Samsung GSM Smartphone Galaxy S II Plus I9105 Android GT-I9105P - Mode d'emploi - Manuel de l'utilisateur - Manuels
-->
Liste des manuels APPLE Liste des produits Sony Liste des produits Dell Liste des Manuels Samsung Listes des Manuels Konica Minolta
Manuels Utilisateurs Samsung :
Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-Series-5-XE500T1C-XE500T1C-H01ZA-Manuels
Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-Series-5-XE500T1C-XE500T1C-H01ZA-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5570-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Combines-Refrigerateur-Combine-RB29FEJNDWW-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-Star-noir-Open-market-GT-S5600-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Plaque-de-cuisson-Table-induction-2-zones-7-2-KW-CTN364N006-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-SMART-Camera-WB250F-SAMSUNG-WB250F-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37B530-LE37B530P7W-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12NSBN-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Haute-Definition-HMX-F90WP-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-51-PS51D550WXZF-serie-5-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51D550C1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32D4003BW-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-SH24TA6D-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-NH200WHXES-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26C457C6H-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22A455C1D-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE22ES5000-ZF-Slim-LED-22-SMART-TV-UE22ES5000W-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-152B-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-BX2240W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-40-UE40D5000WXZF-serie-5-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE40D5000PW-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Jetnoir-Open-market-GT-S8000-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-64-PS64D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS64D8000FS-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P7510-M16-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5750E-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-couleur-CLP-360-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-monochrome-SCX-5637FR-SCX-5637FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-Imprimante-couleur-CLP-775ND-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-RV510I-NP-RV510-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-T24B300-T24B300EW-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-16ppm-Imprimante-laser-mono-ML-1660-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-T23A750-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-DVD-DVD-D530WXZF-serie-5-DVD-D530-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-Ultra-rouge-open-market-GT-S8300-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ultra-Mobilite-NP-N140-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-AS05FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP305V5AD-NP305V5A-T01FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26B350F1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A465C1M-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT63VBPN-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE52A568-LE52A568P3M-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22B650-LE22B650T6W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS58B680-PS58B680T6W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A465-LE32A465C1M-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26C452C4H-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-Cathodique-WS32V54N-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-T27B750EW-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-23-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-S23A350H-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-PL100-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-BX2231-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Combines-RL34HGMG-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV18PSBX-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH18AP2X-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH035FJEA-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12UGEN-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-LE40A796-LE40A796R2M-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV09UGAX-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-NS0351DXEA-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-32-LE32D550WXZF-serie-5-HD-TV-LCD-TV-LE32D550K1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE19C4000PW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A536T1F-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-55-Moniteur-LED-UD55A-mur-d-image-bord-fin-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46C6000-UE46C6000RW-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimantes-Photos-SPP-2040-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-16ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-3205-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-460DR-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQ12UGBN-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-8240NA-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37B653T5P-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26A456C2D-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS42A426-PS42A426C1M-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE19B450C4H-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C5100QW-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV18KBAX-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH060FXEA3A-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40C6900VS-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-AVXCSH028EE-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-AVXTJH036EE-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A457C1D-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12UGAN-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP355V5C-NP355V5C-S03FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5AH-NP300E5A-S05FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-23-Serie-7-All-In-One-700A3B-DP700A3B-S02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-NP300E5C-S04FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP530U3C-NP530U3C-A04FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350E7C-NP350E7C-S07FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300V5AH-NP300V5A-S02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP355V5C-NP355V5C-S01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E7AI-NP300E7A-A04FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-9-NP900X3D-A04FR
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-T03FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP355V5C-NP355V5C-S02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-7-Gamer-700G7A-NP700G7A-S02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S08FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP530U3C-A05FR-manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-T05FR-manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-DP500A2D-S02FR-2-manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C8700XS-manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE32D6750WS-manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46D6200TS-manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50B550-PS50B550T4W-manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-3-300E5A-NP300E5A-S04FR-manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-RVXMHF050EA-manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9103-manuels
Samsung-Stockage-informatique-SSD-MZ-7TD120-manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9100-manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-HT-ES4200-ZFHT-ES4200-manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300V3AH-NP300V3A-S02FR-manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S06FR-manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350V5C-NP350V5C-S07FR-manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-11-6-Serie%209-900X1A-NP900X1A-A01FR-manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-11-6-Serie-7-Slate-PC-700T1AXE-700T1A-A02FR-manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP530U3C-NP530U3C-A01FR-manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-XE500T1C-XE500T1C-A04FR-manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E7AH-NP300E7A-S0DFR-manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Nouveau-Serie-9-900X4C-NP900X4C-A01FR-manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X3C-NP900X3C-A03FR-manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Haute-Definition-HMX-F800BP-manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-5-550P7C-NP550P7C-T03FR-manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4B-NP900X4B-A01FR-manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5369-manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-XE700T1A-XE700T1A-HF1FR-manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-T06FR-manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-9-NP900X3D-A05FR-NP900X3D-A05FR-manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E5A-NP300E5A-S0AFR-manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S24A650S-manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S27C650D-manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S27B970D-manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-YP-GS1CW-manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-XE500T1C-H02FR-manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-S08FR-manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-9-900X3C-A05FR-NP900X3C-A05FR-manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-DP500A2D-S02FR-manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-N7100-manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-51-PS51D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51D8000FS-manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-46-UE46D7000WXZF-serie-7-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE46D7000LS-manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS43E450-ZF-PLASMA-43-HD-TV-PS43E450A1W-manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-Star-2-noir-Open-market-GT-S5620-manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT45JSTS-manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-S3500-noir-Open-market-GT-S3500-manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-NS071SDXEA-manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A626-LE37A626A3M-manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-XE500C21-XE500C21-AZ2FR-manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E5C-NP300E5C-T02FR-manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-27-UE27D5000WXZF-serie-5-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE27D5000NW-2-manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E1130-B.manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z5AH-NP700Z5A-S03FR.manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E1310-NRJ-Mobile-GT-E1310B.manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E2220.manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQ12TSBN.manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-C3750.manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E2550D.manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQ12FAN
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-ES60-SAMSUNG-ES60.manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12KBAN-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH020FNEA-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6570S-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE32ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-3D-UE32ES6300S-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6560S-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE32ES6100W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-40-UE40D6300WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D6300SS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-46-UE46D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE46D8000YS-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH052FWEA-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37C530-LE37C530F1W.manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-S5620.manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV09KBBN.manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-51-PS51D550WXZF-serie-5-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51D550C1W.manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-F480G.manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5AH-NP300E5A-S0CFR.manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-3DUE40ES6710S-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-32-UE32D6500WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE32D6500VS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE22ES5410-ZF-Slim-LED-22-SMART-TVUE22ES5410W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40D8000YQ-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV18PSBN-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV18UGAN-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS50C490-PS50C490B3W-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH068FXEA4-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS51D6900DS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32D450G1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50A676-PS50A676T1M-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH035FEEA-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6540S-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55C8700-UE55C8790XS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46D6570WS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55ES6530S-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6560S-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I8190-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-YP-GI1CW-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9100P-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32S86BD-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS42C96HD-PS-42C96HD-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32T51B-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS42A456-PS42A456P2D-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-46-UE46D5000WXZF-serie-5-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE46D5000PW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS59D530A5W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C6700-UE32C6700US-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-43-PS43D450WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-PDP-TVPS43D450A2W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46B7000-UE46B7000WW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-32-UE32D5000WXZF-serie-5-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE32D5000PW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS43D490A1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-22-UE22ES5400WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C350D1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40C6000RH-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-ES6000-ZF-Lecteur-Blu-Ray-3D-SMART-HUB-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32EH4000-ZF-LED-32-HD-TV-UE32EH4000W-Manuals-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40D5000PW-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S19C450MR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S19C200NW-Manuels
Samsung-InformatiqueMoniteur-LCD-S19C450MW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C4000PW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE22D5000NH-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-HG32EA590LS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C450-LE32C450E1W-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-Mistral-AQV09PSBN-User-Manuals-Manuel
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE26D4003BW-User-Manuals-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS42A466-PS42A466P2M-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26A466-LE26A466C2M-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS50C6970-PS50C6970YS-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Telephone-coulissant-Samsung-S5200-bleu-SFRGT-S5200-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A456-LE32A456C2D-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12UGAX-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-NH160PHXEA-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS50C7000YW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-22-UE22D5000WXZF-serie-5-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE22D5000NW-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5380-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P3100-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-Galaxy-Tab-GT-P1000-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Nexus-noir-Open-market-GT-I9250-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9000-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Note-GT-N7000-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22C430C4W-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH052FJEA-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55C8700XS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS63B680-PS63B680T6W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40C630-LE40C630K1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE50ES6100W-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Oreillette-bluetooth-Kit-Pieton-Bluetooth-HM1700-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A577P2M-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS64E8000-ZF-PLASMA-64-SMART-INTERACTION-3DPS64E8000GS-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-B1930N-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32B651-LE32B651T3P-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-27-UE27D5000WXZF-serie-5-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE27D5000NW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40B7000-UE40B7000WW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46D6500VH-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-Cathodique-CW29Z504N-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A856-LE40A856S1M-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-INTERACTION-3DUE40ES8000S-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22B450-LE22B450C4W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE39EH5003W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40EH6030W-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A437T2D-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12PWAN-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46ES5500-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TVUE46ES5500W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37C530F1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32EH5300W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES7000-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-INTERACTION-3DUE40ES7000S-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-AVXWNH022EE-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Oreillette-bluetooth-Kit-Mains-Libres-Bluetooth-HF1000-BHF1000-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-Cassette-4-voies-MH035FMEA-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV09PSBX-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40D550K1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55ES6100W-AQV09PSBN-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26C450-LE26C450E1W-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-Mistral-AQV09PSBN-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32EH4000-ZF-LED-32-HD-TV-UE32EH4000W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE60EH6000S-Manuels
Samsung TV Audio / Vidéo 3D UE32D6300SS
Samsung TV Audio / Vidéo TV LCD LE32A437T2D
Samsung TV Audio / Vidéo TV PDP PS50A466 PS50A466P2M
Samsung TV Audio / Vidéo TV LED UE46EH5300W
Samsung TV Audio / Vidéo TV LED UE37C6000UE37C6000RW
Samsung Informatique Moniteur LCD 770TFT
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника Плазменные Плазма 51" cерия 5 Full HD PS51E530 PS51E530A3W Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры UE46EH5000W Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры UE46D5000PW Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника Плазменные Плазма 42" Серия 4 HD PS42C431A2 PS42C431A2W Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника Плазменные PS42A410C3 Russe
Samsung TV Audio / Vidéo TV LCD LE40B651LE40B651T3W
Samsung TV Audio / Vidéo TV LCD LE40B651LE40B651T3W Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры UE55B7000WW Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D UE40ES7500S Russe
Samsung Мобильные телефоны Мобильные телефоны C3510 TVGT-C3510T Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника Плазменные PS42B430P2W Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D UE46D7000LS Russe
Samsung Мобильные телефоны Смартфоны Samsung S6012 GT-S5830I Russe
Samsung Мобильные телефоны Смартфоны GT-S5830I Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника ЖК-телевизоры LE40C530F1W Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D UA55D6600WR Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника Плазменные Плазма 43" cерия 4 HD PS43E450PS43E450A1W Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника ЖК-телевизоры LE32B450C4W Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D UA40C7000WR Russe
Samsung Бытовая техника Настенное крепление Настенная сплит-система "Стандарт" AQ07RLAQ07RLN Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры UA40C5000QR Russe
TV Audio / Vidéo 3D 40", UE40D6200WXZF, série 6, SMART TV, 3D, FULL HD, LED TV UE40D6200TS
Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры LED телевизор 32" Серия 4 HD UE32C4000P UE32C4000PW Russe
Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры UE32D5000PW Russe
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-YP-GI1EW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50C430-PS50C430A1W-Francais-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50Q96HD-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46C5100QW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46B7020WW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C4000PH-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQ09UGFN-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-12-MP-Ecran-LCD-2-7-compact-essentiel-Samsung-ES80-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-linge-frontal-WF1702NHWG-YLE-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-U100-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P5100-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-E570-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40D5720RS-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-DP700A3D-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-R200-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A457C1D-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-AS06FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-AS08FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-X420I-NP-X420-JA05FR-France-Manuels
Samsung-TV-AV-LED-UE40B7000WW-Royaume-Uni-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-16-4ppm-Multifonction-lasercouleur-CLX-3185FN-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-16-4ppm-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-300-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-AS06FR-Francais-Manuels
Samsung-Monitors-2493HM-USA-Etats-Unis-Manuels
Samsung-Exhibit-4G-Android-Smartphone-SGH-T759-USA-Etats-Unis-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6100W-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12PSBN-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D7000WXZF-serie-7-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE55D7000LS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40C7700WS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE32D6500VQ-Manuels
Samsung-Refrigerators-26-CU-FT-FRENCH-DOOR-REFRIGERATOR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-QX510-NP-QX510-S01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2165W-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-5800P-Francais-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-Q35-NP-Q35T007-SEF-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-X420I-NP-X420-JA05FR-Francais-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-9201NA-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-9301NA-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-X420I-NP-X420-JA05FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6900-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-3DUE40ES6900S-francais-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-S5150-gold-Open-market-GT-S5150-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-Neo-Forte-EHS-Hybride-NH022NHXEA-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenagers-Front-Loader-WF710Y4BKWQ-EN-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350V5C-S06FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-AV-LED-19-D4003-Series-4-LED-TV%20-UE19D4003BW-Royaume-Uni-Manuels
Samsung-PC-Office-Netbook-NP-N220-Royaume-Uni-Manuels
Samsung-PC-Office-Notebook-R519-Royaume-Uni-Manuels
Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Inde-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-8123NA-Manuels
Samsung-SCX-3400-Pakistan-Manuels
Samsung-PC-Office-Notebook-ATIV-Smart-PC-XE500T1C-3G-XE500T1C-H01SG-Singapour-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenagers-Front-Loader-WF710Y4BKWQ-EN-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350V5C-S06FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-AV-LED-19-D4003-Series-4-LED-TV%20-UE19D4003BW-Royaume-Uni-Manuels
Samsung-PC-Office-Netbook-NP-N220-Royaume-Uni-Manuels
Samsung-PC-Office-Notebook-R519-Royaume-Uni-Manuels
Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Inde-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-8123NA-Manuels
Samsung-SCX-3400-Pakistan-Manuels
Samsung-PC-Office-Notebook-ATIV-Smart-PC-XE500T1C-3G-XE500T1C-H01SG-Singapour-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-ML-1674-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55D6300SS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50C430-PS50C430A1W-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-S3100-gris-Open-market-GT-S3100-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C4000-UE32C4000PW-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-23-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T23A350-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32B350F1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-P1600-BD-P1600A-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-HT-C6930W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE26C4000PW-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R719NP-R719-XA01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-5-550P7C-NP550P7C-T02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Stockage-informatique-SSD-Basic-Kit-64-GoMZ-7PC064B-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-NX-Samsung-Smart-Camera-NX210-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Sans-sac-SC8850-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-Micro-ondes-gril-niche-380-mm-23-L-FG87SST-FG87SST-XEF-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-vaisselle-DW5363PGBSL-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-vaisselle-DW5363PGBWQ-Manuels
Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Feature-Phone-GT-E1175T-Anglais-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C530-LE46C530F1W-Manuels
Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Nexus-GT-I9250-Royaume-Uni-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-5800P-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-550-noir-Open-market-GT-I5500-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-DP700A3D-S01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-WB100-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-YH-820MW-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S22B150N-Manuels
Samsung-Stockage-informatique-Graveur-DVD-Slim-External-8X-DVD-Writer-SE-208AB-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Plaque-de-cuisson-CTN431SC0S-Manuels
24ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-6250FX-Samsung-Manuels
32-UE32D6200WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE32D6200TS-Samsung-Manuels
35-35ppm-Copieur-couleur-CLX-9350ND-Samsung-Manuels
Galaxy-Y-S5360-AndroidGT-S5360-Manuels-Utilisateur-et-Guides-Rapide-Samsung
Manuels-de-l-Utilisateur-19-UE19D4000WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LED-TV-UE19D4000NW-Samsung
Samsung-51-PS51E490WXZF-serie-4-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51E490B1W-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-R730-Red-Gloss-NP-R730-JS01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-SGH-I320-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46C7700-UE46C7700WS-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-RV-RV510-NP-RV510-S01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E7ANP300E7A-A02FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-40-UE40D7000WXZF-serie-7-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D7000LS-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E1150-rouge-Open-market-GT-E1150-Manuels
Samsung-Téléphone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730CE-NP-R730-JT08FR-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-Style-Open-market-SGH-F480-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350V5C-NP350V5C-S03FR-Manuels
Samsung-RV511-NP-RV511-A06MA-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-R590-Crystal-NP-R590-JS01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R530E-NP-R530-JT50FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C630-LE32C630K1W-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-S850-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D6530WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE55D6530WS-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-City-blanc-Orange-GT-S5260P-Manuels
Samsung-TV-AV-PDP-2012-PS43E450A1R-43-inch-HD-Ready-Plasma-TV-Emirats-Arabes-Unis-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Robot-Aspirateur-Robot-2-murs-Virtuel-Noir-SR8895-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E2530-Open-market-GT-E2530-Manuels
Samsung-Peripheriques-pour-PC-Multifonctions-monochromes-SCX-3405W-Manuels
Samsung-I9300-GT-I9300-Afrique-du-Nord-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels
Samsung-Camera-Camcorder-Compact-ST66-SAMSUNG-ST66-Manuels
Samsung-PC-Office-Mono-Multi-function-SCX-3405FW-Hong-Kong-Manuels
Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Samsung-GALAXY-S-III-GALAXY-S3-GT-I9300-Singapour-Manuels
Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Music-GT-S6010-Royaume-Uni-Manuels
Samsung-Home-Appliance-Top-Mounted-Fridge-Freezer-SR365TSS-Nouvelle-Zelande-Manuels
Samsung-Home-Appliance-Top-Loader-Top-Load-Washing-Machine-WA10W9-Singapour-Manuels
Samsung-electromenagers-Front-Loader-WF710Y4BKWQ-EN-Belgique-Manuels
Samsung-PC-Office-LCD-LED-S22C200BW-Hong-Kong-Manuels
Samsung-Camaras-Alta-definicion-Videocamara-HD-F80HMX-F80SP-Espagne-Manuels
Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Emirats-Arabes-Unis-Manuels
Samsung-Sprzet-komputerowy-i-Drukarki-Notebooki-NP-R710-AS04PL-Pologne-Manuels
Samsung-Informatica-LCD-2043SW-Portugues-Portugais-Bresil-Manuels
Samsung-TV-AV-3D-Blu-ray-HT-E3550-English-Anglais-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X1B-NP900X1B-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S0CFR-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT50QMSW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46EH6030W-Manuels
Samsung-Home-Appliance-Side-by-Side-RSA1STMG-Arabe-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS59D6900DS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-3DUE40ES6300S-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z7C-NP700Z7C-S02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-Refrigerateur-Side-By-Side-RS6178UGDSR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4C-NP900X4C-A02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-S730-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-E590-Manuels
20ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-6220FX-Samsung-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-5100P-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-RC710E-NP-RC710-S02FR-Francais-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-XE500T1C-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730CE-NP-R730-JT0BFR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-FS02FR-francais-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-FS02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-RC710E-NP-RC710-S02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9100G-francais-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-NP300E5C-AF5FR-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-C520-Hello-Kitty-Open-marketS-GH-C520-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Autres-Samsung-Player-mini-2GT-C3310-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP530U3C-NP530U3C-A06FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z5C-NP700Z5C-S02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-Z360-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46A856-LE46A856S1M-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B620T2WXXC-LE40B620R3W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A568-LE40A568P3M-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQ18FAN-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22D450G1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-46-UE46D6200WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE46D6200TS-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4C-NP900X4C-A02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4D-A02FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-NL22B-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S0BFR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46A568-LE46A568P3M-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE65ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-65-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE65ES8000S-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6530S-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-C6625-gris-Open-market-GT-C6625-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46B8000WW-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Corby-Pro-rouge-Open-market-GT-B5310-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-Refrigerateur-SBS-A-507-L-Blanc-RSA1TWP-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-Micro-chaine-MM-D430DWXZF-serie-4-DVD-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A626-LE40A626A3M-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Autres-GT-C3310-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-C3520-GT-C3520-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-Refrig%C3%A9rateur-SBS-A-510-L-Inox-RSH5TERS-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-Micro-ondes-mono-23L-SILVER-ME82V-Manuels*
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40D503F7W-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2165-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-RSA1DTMG-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-6900-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-HT-C5530-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S24B300BL-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-HT-D4200-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730C-NP-R730-JB03FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-R-mix-YP-R1JCP-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-P2470HD-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-P1600-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-J770-Open-market-SGH-J770-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Home-cinema-DVD-5.1-HT-D350WXZF-serie-3HT-D350-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-6200FX-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-Smart-Camera-WB850F-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z5AH-NP700Z5A-S02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP305V5AD-NP305V5A-S02FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6530S-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50A456-PS50A456P2D-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40D6570WS-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-22-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T22A300-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-S2-YP-S2QB-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-24ppm-Imprimante-laser-mono-ML-2580N-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-3710ND-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40D5003BW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-P2500-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-U600-Open-market-SGH-U600-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R710-NP-R710-ASS1FR-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-PL101-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-S3-GT-I9300-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A566P1M-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46D550K1W-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH026FWEA-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV07PSBN-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50B850-PS50B850Y1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE37D5000ZF-UE37D5000PW-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-NH300WHXES-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40ES5700S-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-60-UE60D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE60D8000YS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32D403E2W-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-ST500-SAMSUNG-ST500-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-S5610-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-S3-GT-I9300-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-27-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T27A300-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E1170-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40R86BD-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22C350-LE22C350D1W-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-J700-SGH-J700G-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-Micro-ondes-Gril-23L-SILVER-GS89F-1SPGS89F-1SP-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E5A-NP300E5A-A02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-RC-RC730-NP-RC730-S05FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-Multifonction-monochrome-SCX-3405W-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-23-Serie-7-All-In-One-700A3B-DP700A3B-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-RC-RC530-NP-RC530-S03FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-3-300E5-ANP300E5A-S08FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A568-LE37A568P3M-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-24-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T24A350-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-G600-Open-market-SGH-G600-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Haute-Definition-HMX-QF20BP-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-PL90-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C550-LE32C550J1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE23R86BD-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26C450E1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A436T1D-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E1151-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-P3YP-P3JCB-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-16-4ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-3185W-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique%20Multifonction-Monochrome-24ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-4824FN-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-11-6-Serie-7-Slate-PC-700T1A-3G-XE700T1A-H01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9100G-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-F250-Open-market-SGH-F250-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730-NP-R730-JA05FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE26D4003BW-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Player-Duo-noir-Open-market-SGH-D980-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40C5100QW-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-7-Gamer-700G7A-NP700G7A-S01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Nouveau-Serie-9-900X3C-NP900X3C-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-4.0-Blanc-8GoYP-G1CW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-Micro-chaine-MM-D470DWXZF-serie-4-DVD-MM-D470D-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Solid-B2100-rouge-Open-market-GT-B2100-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-13-3-Serie-5-ULTRA-530U3B-NP530U3B-A02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Chat-335-gris-Open-market-GT-S3350-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LE46C750-LE46C750R2W-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Xcover-GT-S5690-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B530P7W-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-linge-frontal-WF0702NBE-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55C7700-UE55C7700WS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-E8300-ZF-Enregistreur-Blu-Ray-320-Go-SMART-HUB-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LE46C750-LE46C750R2W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Enregistreur-DVD-DVD-SH893-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-NX-Systeme-NX-NX100-14-6-MP-Ecran-7-6cm-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-Imprimante-couleur-CLP-365-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-305E5A-NP305E5A-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Samsung-Q3YP-Q3CB-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-B3310bleu-Open-market-GT-B3310-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-U600-Open-market-SGH-U600B-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E250-Open-market-SGH-E250-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S24B350H-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350E7C-NP350E7C-S0BFR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55ES7000-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE55ES7000S-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4D-NP900X4D-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z7CH-NP700Z7C-S01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-14-Serie-7-Chronos-700Z3A-NP700Z3A-S02FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-SUR40-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE32D6510WS-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-300V3A-NP300V3A-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ultra-Mobilite-NP-NC10-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I5800-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2160-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R720E-NP-R720-JS03FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730CE-NP-R730-JT07FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R620E-NP-R620-JS02FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32D5720RS-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP550P5C-NP550P5C-T04FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE55D8000YS-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-RV-RV515-NP-RV515-S04FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TV-3DUE46ES6710S-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6900-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-3DUE40ES6900S-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-HG40EA590LS-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-CE117PPT-Manuels
Samsung-TV-AV-3D-TV-TV-UN50ES6350F-Coree-du-Sud-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-19ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-4200-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-32-32ppm-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-770ND-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-16-4ppm-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-320-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-32-UE32D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE32D5700RS-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9000-RW8-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-TC220W-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9001-M8-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5800-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-Wi-Fi-GT-P5110-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-GT-P3100-Manuels-Mode-d-emploi
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Galaxy-S-Advance-GT-I9070P-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LE40C750-LE40C750R2W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32ES5500-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-UE32ES5500W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A676-LE40A676A1M-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5230-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40EH5300W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46B651-LE46B651T3W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE22D5010NW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32EH5000-ZF-LED-32-FULL-HD-UE32EH5000W-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Note-blanc-SFR-GT-N7000-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-7.0-Wi-FiGT-P3110-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P7300-M16-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Note-noir-SFRGT-N7000-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5839I-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS63C7700-PS63C7700YS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE50ES6900S-ZF-Slim-LED-50-SMART-TV-3D-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55D6300SS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-46-UE46D6500WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE46D6500VS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A676-LE32A676A1M-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS63C7700-PS63C7700YS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D6200WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE55D6200TS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55ES6540S-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40D6750WS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C450E1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40C530-LE40C530F1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46D6750WS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40B6000-UE40B6000VW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A556P1F-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46C6710-UE46C6710US-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40C5100QW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50C530-PS50C530C1W-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-14-Serie-5-ULTRA-530U4B-NP530U4B-S01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-DV90-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-Refrigerateur-DP-A306-L-Silver-RT37GBSS-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-Refrigerateur-DP-A306-L-Silver-RT37GBSS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-460DR-2-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT45JSTS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME32B-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Refrigerateur-une-porte-RZ90HAWW-Samsung-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT41MASW-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P6800-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-C24B550U-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5839I-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-linge-frontal-Lave-linge-EcoBubble-12kg-1400tours-WF1124XBC-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Ampli-Tuner-AV-HW-E551-ZF-Barre-de-son-Format-46-Convertible-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9305-Phone-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-NP300E5C-AF2FR-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV24PSBN-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C630K1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C630K1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE37B6000VW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A466-LE40A466C2M-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A676-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-AVXDUH112EE-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B651T3P-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Autres-Samsung-S5220GT-S5220-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-9-900X4C-NP900X4C-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT59NBPN-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9305-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S27B750V-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Refrigerateur-une-porte-RZ90HAWW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME75B-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT59PMSW-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-13-3Serie-9-900X3A-NP900X3A-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME40B-Manuels
Samsung-SGH-D500-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Manuels
Samsung-Table-induction-3-foyers-7-2-KW-CTN463NC01-CTN463NC01-XEF-Manuels
Samsung-RR92HAWW-Refrigerateur-une-porte-Monochrome-Manuels
Samsung-ML-2160-Imprimante-Monochrome-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME46B-Manuels
Samsung-LE37A466-LE37A466C2M-Manuels
Samsung-Zephyr-AQV09YWAN-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-GT-P5100-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-GT-P3100-Manuels
Samsung-51-PS51E490WXZF-serie-4-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51E490B1W-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Note-II-GT-N7100-Manuels
Samsung-AQV12KBBN-Pologne-Manuels
Samsung-ML-2165W-Roumanie-Manuels
Samsung-Notebook-Serie-7-Chronos-700Z5C-S01-NP700Z5C-S01DE-Manuels
Samsung-Player-One-noir-Open-market-GT-S5230-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-S-SCL-noir-Open-market-GT-I9003-M4-Manuels
Samsung-Samsung-Galaxy-Pro-gris-Open-market-GT-B7510-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Gio-noir-SFR-GT-S5660-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5800-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Spica-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5700-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7610-noir-Open-market-GT-B7610-Manuels
Samsung-S5610-GT-S5610-Manuels
Samsung-LE32C650-LE32C650L1W-Manuels
Samsung-N145Plus-NP-N145P-Manuels
Samsung-NP20-NP20FK02BG-SEF-Manuels
Samsung-GT-S5570_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_110726_Screen.pdf-Manuels
Samsung-GT-I9070P_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_120710_Screen.pdf-Manuels
Samsung-GT-I9300_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.2_120725_Screen.pdf-Manuels
Samsung-Gainable-Slim-MH026FEEA-Manuels
Samsung-40-UE40D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D5700RS-Manuels
Samsung-UE46C8700-UE46C8790XS-Manuels
Samsung-UE46ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TV-3D-UE46ES6300S-Manuels
Samsung-2012_Skype_Eng-0316-1-Manuels
Samsung-UE75ES9000S-Slim-LED-75-SMART-Interaction-3D-Manuels
Samsung-Refrigerateur-1porteA-350-L-Blanc-RR82FHSW-Manuels
Samsung-UE26EH4000-ZF-LED-26-HD-TV-UE26EH4000W-Manuels
Samsung-E-MANUAL-X9DVBEU4E-ENG-Manuel
Samsung-GT-S5360_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_111130_Screen-Manuel
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuel
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuels
Samsung-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-4-0-Blanc-8Go-YP-G1CW-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-551-noir-Open-marketGT-I5510-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Note-10-1-GT-N8000-Manuels
Samsung-GALAXY-S-II-LTE-SC-03D-JP-Manuels
Samsung-GALAXY-Note-SC-05D-JP-Manuels
Samsung-NP-R530-NP-R530-JA02FR-Manuels
Samsung-UE40C6000-UE40C6000RW-Manuels
Samsung-Congelateur-1porteA-277-L-Blanc-RZ80FHSW-Manuels
Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-GT-B5310-Manuels
Samsung-32-LE32D450WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LCD-TV-Manuels
Samsung-46-UE46D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE46D5700RS-Manuels
Samsung-UE46ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE46ES8000S-Manuels
Samsung-UE55ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-TV-3D-UE55ES6300S-Manuels
Samsung-LE46A676-LE46A676A1M-Manuels
Samsung-UE46C7700-UE46C7700WS-Manuels
Samsung-Refrigerateur-DP-A275-L-Blanc-RT34GBSW-Manuels
Samsung-UE32ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-3DUE32ES6710S-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Ace-noir-Open-market-GT-S5830-Manuels
Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-GT-P1000-GT-P1000-M16-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7330-noir-Open-market-GT-B7330-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-Lite-noir-Orange-GT-B7300-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-S2-GT-I9100-Manuels
Samsung-Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFRGT-I8000-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFR-GT-I8000-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-7-noir-Open-market-GT-I8700-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-noir-Bouygues-GT-I7500-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-mini-gris-Open-market-GT-S5570-Manuels
Samsung-XE700T1A-HF1FR-Manuels
17,3" Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S01FR - Manuels
40", UE40D6500WXZF, série 6, SMART TV, 3D, FULL HD, LED TV - UE40D6500VS - Manuels
Micro-chaîne, MM-D330DWXZF, série 3 - MM-D330 - Manuels
Samsung Galaxy Ace noir - Open market - GT-S5830 - Manuels
Samsung Galaxy S II noir - Open market - Manuels
Samsung Galaxy S III - GT-I9300 - Manuels
Samsung Galaxy S noir - Open market - GT-I9000 - Manuels
Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S03FR - Manuels
UE55ES8000/ZF, Slim LED 55", SMART INTERACTION, 3D - UE55ES8000S - Manuels
16/4ppm Imprimante laser couleur CLP-310 Manuels
16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3170FN Manuels
16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3185FW Manuels Samsung
16/4ppm Multifonction laser couleur CLX-3185 Manuels Samsung
samsung-Wave-II-noir-Open-market-GT-S8530-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-noir-Open-market-GT-S8500-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-M-noir-Open-market-GT-S7250-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-578-noir-Open-market-GT-S5780-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-533-noir-Open-market-GT-S5330-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-3-noir-Open-market-GT-S8600-Manuels
Samsung-Player-HD-noir-Open-market-GT-I8910-Manuels
Samsung-Player-Duo-noir-Open-market-SGH-D980-Manuels
Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-W-noir-Open-market-GT-I8350-Manuels
Samsung - Aspirateur robot Navibot SR8845
Samsung - Aspirateur sans sac EcoStyle SC86G0 gris foncé/fuchsia
Samsung - Aspirateur sans sac SC4780 noir
Samsung - Four micro-ondes MW73B - blanc
SAMSUNG - Micro ondes 36 L - Micro ondes 36 L - CP1395ES
SAMSUNG - Micro ondes 42 L - Micro ondes 42 L - CQ1570U
Samsung - Micro-ondes combiné CE117PT-B
SAMSUNG - Micro-ondes Grill simultané GS89F-1SP
Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED + Office Famille et Etudiant 2010 1 poste
Samsung Aspirateur sans sac EcoStyle SC86H0 gris clair/bleu
Samsung B1930HD 18.5" LCD TNT HD
Samsung Bac papier supplémentaire ML-S3710A - 520 feuilles
Samsung Câble Adaptateur HDTV pour Galaxy Tab 8.9" / 10.1"
Samsung Câble data pour téléphones mobiles Samsung
Samsung Caméra additionnelle de vidéosurveillance SEB-1015RWP EX
Samsung caméra Skype CY-STC1100
Samsung Ch@t335 - GT-S3350 - Noir
Samsung Chargeur allume-cigares micro-USB
Samsung chargeur de voyage pour SGH-P260 et SGH-G600 - Modèle Noir
Samsung Chargeur secteur de voyage micro-USB
Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLP-325 WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0
Samsung CLP-620ND - Imprimante Ethernet
Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0
Samsung CLX-3185W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet
Samsung CLX-6220FX - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung Coque silicone Croisillons pour nexus S
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128D 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128N 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256D 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256N 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go MZ-7PC064D 830 Series
Samsung dongle Wi-Fi WIS12ABGNX
Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0
Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire + 1 Camel
Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire matelassée + 1 Rose
Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi
Samsung EcoBlue SC61E0 bleu azur
Samsung ES30 Noir + Carte SD 2 Go
Samsung Etui coque pour Galaxy Note - Noir
Samsung Etui cuir pour Galaxy S II - Noir
Samsung Etui flap en cuir pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - Noir
Samsung Eui cuir pour i9000 Galaxy S
Samsung Galaxy Ace s5830 (sous Androïd)
Samsung Galaxy Mini (sous Android)
Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Blanc
Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Noir
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc 32 Go + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Noir 16 Go 3G
Samsung Galaxy Tab 8,9" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi
Samsung Galaxy Xcover s5690 (sous Androïd) - Smartphone Samsung Solide certifié IP67
Samsung Galaxy Y Pro B5510 (sous Androïd)
Samsung Galaxy Y Young s5360 (sous Androïd)
Samsung Graveur DVD Externe Wifi - SE-208BW - Noir
Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 10,1"
Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 8,9"
Samsung I9103 Galaxy R (sous Android)
Samsung Kit de connexion USB & SD pour Galaxy Tab 10.1"
Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SDE-3003P/EX
Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SME-4220
Samsung Kit Etui + Clavier Bluetooth pour Galaxy Tab 10,1" - Brun foncé
Samsung kit piéton filaire stéréo Jack 3,5 mm
Samsung Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Galaxy S2 - Transparente/Miroir
Samsung Lot de 2 Protections d'écran pour i9000 Galaxy S
Samsung Lunettes 3D SSG-3050GB
Samsung ME82V Micro-onde monofonction
SAMSUNG Micro-ondes combiné CE117APT B
SAMSUNG Micro-ondes combiné CE137NEMX
Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-2165W - Imprimante WiFi
Samsung ML-2545 - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-2955DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung ML-2955ND - Imprimante Ethernet
Samsung ML-3310D - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-3710DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung MV800 Noir + Etui Zadig & Voltaire Noir
Samsung NP300E7A-S03FR 17,3" LED
Samsung NP700Z5A-S02FR 15,6" LED
Samsung NX 60 mm f/2.8 ED OIS SSA Macro i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX 85 mm f/1.4 ED SSA i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 16 mm f/2.4 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 20 mm f/2.8 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 30 mm f/2.0; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 18 - 55 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 OIS + Flash SEF-8A NG8
Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 20 - 50 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 ED i-Function + Flash SEF-8A NG8
Samsung Oreillette Bluetooth HM1200
Samsung Pack d'accessoire pour Galaxy S II I9100
Samsung Pack étui cuir + chargeur + protection d'écran pour Galaxy S
Samsung PL210 Noir + Carte mémoire Lexar MicroSDHC 8 Go
Samsung Player mini 2 c3310 - Gris Métal
Samsung Player Mini C3300 - Noir
Samsung Port parallèle ML-PAR100 pour imprimante
Samsung RF712 E7P-C7261 17,3" LED 3D Blu-Ray USB 3.0 + lunettes
Samsung S24B300HL Moniteur 23,6" LED
Samsung SC4790 - Aspirateur sans sac - traineau - rouge
Samsung SCX-3405 - Imprimante Multifonctions
Samsung SCX-3405F - Imprimante Multifonctions
Samsung SCX-3405FW - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet
Samsung SCX-3405W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi
Samsung SCX-4729FD - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung SCX-4729FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung SCX-5737FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung SE-084D graveur DVD externe slim USB 2.0
Samsung SE208AB Graveur DVD externe USB 2.0
Samsung SLB-11A pour Samsung WB1000
Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 10,1"
Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 8,9"
Samsung station d'accueil SSD-760 E2/EUR
Samsung SyncMaster C23A550U 23" LED
Samsung SyncMaster C23A750X 23" LED
Samsung Syncmaster S23A700D 23" LED 3D
Samsung SyncMaster S24A350H 24" LED
Samsung Syncmaster T22A550 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD
Samsung Système de vidéosurveillance Baby Monitor SEW-3022WP/ EX
Samsung T22A350 21,5" LED Tuner TNT
Samsung Toner MLT-D101S pour imprimantes Samsung SCX-3405 & ML-2165 - Noir
Samsung UE32ES6710 LED 3D blanc
Samsung UE46ES6710 LED 3D blanc
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0
Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0
Samsung Viseur électronique EVF10
Samsung WIS09ABGN LinkStick WLAN-Adapter
Samsung WMN250M accroche murale
Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go + Casque JVC HA-S155-P rose
This user manual includes detailed usage
instructions for your camera. Please read
this manual thoroughly.
User Manual
NX5
Ä Click a topic
Quick reference
Contents
Basic functions
Basic shooting
Extended shooting functions
Playback/Editing
Camera settings menu
Appendixes2
Health and safety information
Always comply with the following precautions and usage tips to avoid dangerous situations and ensure peak
performance of your camera.
Warning—situations that could cause injury to
yourself or others
Caution—situations that could cause damage to
your camera or other equipment
Note—notes, usage tips, or additional
information
Do not use your camera near flammable or
explosive gases and liquids
Do not use your camera near fuels, combustibles,
or flammable chemicals. Do not store or carry
flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the
same compartment as the camera or its accessories.
Keep your camera away from small children and
pets
Keep your camera and all accessories out of the reach
of small children and animals. Small parts may cause
choking or serious injury if swallowed. Moving parts and
accessories may present physical dangers as well.
Prevent damage to subjects’ eyesight
Do not use the flash in close proximity (closer than
1 m/3 ft) to people or animals. Using the flash too
close to your subject’s eyes can cause temporary or
permanent damage.
Handle and dispose of batteries and chargers
with care
Use only Samsung-approved batteries and
chargers. Incompatible batteries and chargers can
cause serious injuries or damage to your camera.
Never dispose of batteries in a fire. Follow all local
regulations when disposing of used batteries.
Never place batteries or cameras on or in heating
devices, such as microwave ovens, stoves, or
radiators. Batteries may explode when overheated.
Handle and store your camera carefully and
sensibly
Do not allow your camera to get wet—liquids can
cause serious damage. Do not handle your camera
with wet hands. Water damage to your camera can
void your manufacturer’s warranty.
•
•
•
•
Safety warnings
Safety precautions 3
Do not expose the camera to direct sunlight or
high temperatures for an extended period of
time. Prolonged exposure to sunlight or extreme
temperatures can cause permanent damage to your
camera’s internal components.
Avoid using or storing your camera in dusty, dirty,
humid, or poorly-ventilated areas to prevent damage
to moving parts and internal components.
Remove the batteries from your camera when storing
it for an extended period of time. Installed batteries
may leak or corrode over time and cause serious
damage to your camera.
Protect your camera from sand and dirt when using it
on beaches or in other similar areas.
Protect your camera from impact, shock, bending, or
press of heavy goods when you connect either cable
or power code. It may damage your camera or cable
or cause by electric shock or fire.
Exercise caution when connecting cables or adaptors
and installing batteries and memory cards. Forcing
the connectors, improperly connecting cables, or
improperly installing batteries and memory cards can
damage ports, connectors, and accessories.
Do not insert foreign objects into any of your
camera’s compartments, slots, or access points.
Damage due to improper use may not be covered by
your warranty.
Do not use broken power cord, plug, or wall-outlet. It
may cause by electric shock or fire.
Protect batteries, chargers, and memory cards
from damage
Avoid exposing batteries or memory cards to very
cold or very hot temperatures (below 0º C/32º F or
above 40º C/104º F). Extreme temperatures can
reduce the charging capacity of your batteries and
can cause memory cards to malfunction.
Prevent batteries from making contact with metal
objects, as this can create a connection between
the + and – terminals of your battery and lead to
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
temporary or permanent battery damage.
Prevent memory cards from making contact with
liquids, dirt, or foreign substances. If dirty, wipe the
memory card clean with a soft cloth before inserting
in your camera.
Turn off the camera when inserting or removing the
memory card.
Do not bend, drop, or subject memory cards to
heavy impact or pressure.
Do not use memory cards that have been formatted
by other cameras or by a computer. Reformat the
memory card with your camera.
Never use a damaged charger, battery, or memory
card.
Use only Samsung-approved accessories
Using incompatible accessories may damage your
camera, cause injury, or void your warranty.
Protect your camera’s lens
Do not expose the lens to direct sunlight, as this may
discolor the image sensor or cause it to malfunction.
Protect your lens from fingerprints and scratches. Clean
your lens with a soft, clean, debris-free lens cloth.
Allow only qualified personnel to service your
camera
Do not allow unqualified personnel to service the
camera or attempt to service the camera yourself. Any
damage that results from unqualified service is not
covered by your warranty.
Ensure maximum battery and charger life
Overcharging batteries may shorten battery life. After
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Important usage information 4
Basic functions 12
Learn about your camera’s layout, icons, and
basic functions for shooting.
Basic shooting 38
Learn how to take a photo by selecting a
mode and how to record a video.
Extended shooting functions 50
Learn about the options you can set in
shooting mode. By using the shooting options,
you can enjoy more customized pictures and
movies.
Playback/Editing 78
Learn how to play back photos, videos, and
edit photos or videos. Also, learn how to
connect your camera to your computer, photo
printer, TV, or HDTV.
Camera settings menu 103
The camera use environment can be set to a
desired state by using the setup menu.
Appendixes 109
Refer to settings, error messages,
specifications, and maintenance tips.
charging is finished, disconnect the cable from your
camera.
Over time, unused batteries will discharge and must
be recharged before use.
Disconnect chargers from power sources when not
in use.
Use batteries only for their intended purpose.
Exercise caution when using the camera in
humid environments
When transferring the camera from a cold environment
to a warm and humid one, condensation can form on
the delicate electronic circuitry and memory card. In
this situation, wait for at least 1 hour until all moisture
has evaporated before using the camera.
Check that the camera is operating properly
before use
The manufacturer takes no responsibility for any
loss of files or damage that may result from camera
malfunction or improper use.
Copyright information
Microsoft Windows and the Windows logo are
registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and the term "High Definition
Multimedia Interface" are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licencing LLC.
•
•
•
•
•
Organization of the user manual
Camera specifications or contents of this manual
may be changed without prior notice due to
upgrade of camera functions.
For Open Source License information, refer to the
“OpenSourceInfo.pdf” in the provided CD-ROM.
•
•5
Indications used in this manual
Shooting mode Marking
Smart Auto
Program
Aperture Priority
Shutter Speed Priority
Manual
Night
Portrait
Landscape
Scene
Movie
Shooting mode explanation shown next to the title
This shows that the functions explained can only be
selected from within the shooting mode. In the case
of the mode, this corresponds to only part of
the scene.
Ex) Adjusting exposure (brightness)
The diagram below illustrates the shooting mode dial
on the camera body.
To select a shooting mode, you rotate the dial until
the mode you want lines up with the hash mark on
the camera.
The diagram below shows the status has been
changed to ( ).
Directional Keys in the User's Manual
When explaining the steps needed for navigating the
menu, the up, down, left and right directional arrows
are shown below.
Ex) Executing the 'Play' mode
The user can check saved pictures and movies.
1 Press [ ]
• Show most recently saved files.
2
Check the following pictures sequentially by
using [X].
Adjusting the exposure (brightness)
The images can be taken bright or dark according to the
amount of light. In this case, appropriate adjustment can
be made by controlling the amount of light entered into
the lens.
S Applying - S 0 S Applying +
(Program),
(Aperture
priority),
(Shutter priority),
(Night),
(Portrait),
(Landscape),
(Scene), or
(Movie) mode.
Currently
selected
shooting
mode
AF MF
WB
ISO
[S]
[T]
[W] [X]6
Menu display used in this manual
Menu display of the photo shooting mode
Menu display of the movie shooting mode
Ex) Setting the image quality of movie file
1 Set the mode dial to .
2 Press [MENU].
3 Select Shooting1 ( 1) → Quality.
4 Select a desired image quality.
Icons used in this manual
Symbol Explanation
Additional information about the function
Safety warnings and precautions
[ ] Indicates a camera button, for example:
[Shutter] represents the shutter button.
( ) Shows the reference page
→
Display when selecting a menu or option within
the step
Example: Select Shooting 1 ( 1) → Quality.
(represents select Shooting 1 ( 1), and then
Quality)
* Comment explaining symbols
Abbreviations used in this manual
Abbreviations Explanation
AF (Auto Focus) Auto focus
BKT (Bracketing) Bracketing
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) Printing order mark
EV (Exposure Value) Exposure value
OIS (Optical Image Stabilization)
Optical image
stabilization
ISO (International Standard for color
negative film) Film sensitivity
WB (White Balance) White balance
1 2 3 1 1 2 3
Shooting 1(
1)
Shooting 2(
2)
Shooting 3(
3)
User setup (
1)
Setting 1(
1)
Setting 2(
2)
Setting 3(
3)
1 2 3 1 1 2 3
Shooting 1( 1)
Shooting 2( 2)
Shooting 3( 3)7
Pressing the shutter
Half-press [Shutter]: press the shutter halfway
down
Press [Shutter]: press the shutter all the way down
Half-press [Shutter] Press [Shutter]
Subject, background, and composition
Subject: the main object of a scene, such as a
person, animal, or still life
Background: the objects around the subject
Composition: the combination of a subject and
background
Subjectuect
Background
Composition
•
•
•
•
•
Exposure (Brightness)
The amount of light that enters your camera
determines the exposure. You can alter the exposure
with shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed.
By altering the exposure, your photos will be darker
or lighter.
Normal exposure Overexposure (too bright)
Expressions used in this manual8
Viewing files by category in
Smart Album f 81
Deleting all files on the
memory card f 83
Viewing files as a slide show
f 84
Viewing files on a TV or HDTV
f 92
Connecting your camera to a
computer f 93
Adjusting sound and volume
f 105
Adjusting the brightness of the
display f 105
Changing the display language
f 105
Setting the date and time
f 107
Formatting the memory card
f 106
Troubleshooting f 115
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Taking photos of people
mode → Beauty Shot f47
Red-eye reduction f56
Face Detection AF f64
•
•
•
Taking photos at night or in
the dark
mode f45
Flash setting options f55
ISO speed setting f59
•
•
•
Taking action photos
mode f42
Continuous, Burst shooting f73
•
•
Taking photos of text, insects,
or flowers
mode → Close-up shot f39
Using the White Balance f68
•
•
Adjusting the exposure
(brightness)
ISO speed setting f59
Adjusting exposure f66
Metering f67
BRK(Bracketing) f74
•
•
•
•
Applying a different effect
Picture Wizard f75
Photo Style f88
•
•
Reducing camera shake
• Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) f35
Quick reference9
Contents
Basic functions ....................................................12
Unpacking ................................................................. 13
Title and role of each part .......................................... 14
Diopter adjustment dial/eye-cup/Status lamp ........... 16
Description for each part of the lens ......................... 17
Preparations before shooting .................................... 18
Charging the battery ................................................. 18
Installing the battery .................................................. 19
Installing the memory card ....................................... 20
Mounting/dismounting the lens ................................ 21
Connecting the strap ................................................ 22
Turning on the power and initialization ...................... 23
Icons ........................................................................ 25
Option/menu selection method ................................. 26
Using the dial ............................................................ 26
Using [Fn] ................................................................. 27
Setting the display and sound ................................... 28
Changing the display type ........................................ 28
Setting user display .................................................. 29
Setting the sound ..................................................... 29
Setting the screen display ........................................ 30
Simple picture-taking method ................................... 31
Tips for getting a clearer photo.................................. 32
Holding your camera correctly .................................. 32
Image stabilization .................................................... 32
Half-pressing the shutter button ............................... 32
Getting your subject in focus .................................... 33
Setting the automatic/manual focus function ............ 34
Zooming ................................................................... 34
Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) ............................... 35
Using the OIS in the menu option ............................ 36
Depth preview .......................................................... 37
Basic shooting .....................................................38
Using the Smart Auto mode ...................................... 39
Using the Program mode .......................................... 40
Using the Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority,
or Manual mode ........................................................ 41
Using the Aperture Priority mode .............................. 41
Aperture value .......................................................... 41
Using the Shutter Priority mode ................................ 42
Shutter speed ........................................................... 42
Using the Manual mode ........................................... 43
Using the Night/Portrait/Landscape mode ................ 45
Using the night mode ............................................... 45
Using the portrait mode ............................................ 45
Using the landscape mode ....................................... 45
Using the Scene mode .............................................. 46
Using the Beauty Shot mode ....................................... 47
Recording a Movie .................................................... 48
Setting the aperture value ......................................... 48
To fade out the screen ............................................. 48
Using the Wind Cut .................................................. 4910
Contents
Extended shooting functions ...............................50
Setting the resolution and quality .............................. 51
Setting a resolution ................................................... 51
Setting the image quality of the picture ..................... 52
Setting the quality of movie....................................... 52
Noise reduction ........................................................ 53
Using the timer function ............................................ 54
Setting the timer function .......................................... 54
Taking a picture in a dark place ................................. 55
Using the flash popup button ................................... 55
Setting the flash option ............................................. 55
Using the red-eye fix function ................................... 56
1st Curtain, 2nd Curtain ........................................... 56
Adjusting the amount of flash light ............................ 57
Using an external flash unit (purchased separately) .. 58
Adjusting the ISO sensitivity ...................................... 59
Focusing methods .................................................... 60
Changing the Focusing methods .............................. 60
AF Priority ................................................................. 60
Using the AF assist light ........................................... 61
Changing the focus area .......................................... 61
Setting the focus of the selected area ...................... 62
Setting the MF Assist................................................ 63
Face detection .......................................................... 64
Normal face detection .............................................. 64
Self-portrait face detection ....................................... 65
Brightness and color adjustment of picture ............... 66
Adjusting the exposure (brightness) .......................... 66
Exposure adjustment................................................ 66
Changing the brightness measurement method ....... 67
Setting the white balance ......................................... 68
Color space .............................................................. 71
Smart range ............................................................. 72
Changing the shooting method ................................. 73
Successive shooting method and timer setup .......... 73
Detailed bracket setup ............................................. 74
Special effect/photo retouching ................................ 75
Picture wizard ........................................................... 75
Key Mapping ............................................................. 77
Setting the Key Mapping .......................................... 7711
Contents
Playback/Editing ..................................................78
Play (picture/movie) ................................................... 79
Viewing pictures in the play mode ............................ 79
View files in the smart album by category ................. 81
Converting into the thumbnail view ........................... 81
File protection ........................................................... 82
Deleting a file ............................................................ 82
Enlargement/reduction ............................................. 84
View a movie ............................................................ 85
Picture editing ........................................................... 87
Changing the resolution ............................................ 87
Rotating .................................................................... 87
Red-eye fix ............................................................... 88
Adjusting the backlight ............................................. 88
Picture style .............................................................. 88
Face retouching........................................................ 88
Setting the print info (DPOF) ..................................... 89
Viewing files on a TV or HDTV ................................... 91
Transferring files to your computer ............................ 93
For Windows users ................................................... 93
For Mac users .......................................................... 96
Using Intelli-studio .................................................... 97
Transferring files using Intelli-studio .......................... 98
Using the Samsung RAW Converter ......................... 99
Correcting the exposure ......................................... 100
Handling the JPEG/TIFF files as you edit RAW files ... 101
Saving the RAW files into JPEG or TIFF format ...... 101
Printing photos with a photo printer (PictBridge) ..... 102
Camera settings menu .......................................103
Camera settings menu ............................................ 104
Sound .................................................................... 105
Display.................................................................... 105
Normal setup 1 ....................................................... 106
Normal setup 2 ....................................................... 107
Normal setup 3 ....................................................... 108
Appendixes ........................................................109
Error messages ....................................................... 110
Camera maintenance .............................................. 111
Cleaning your camera............................................. 111
About memory cards .............................................. 112
About the battery.................................................... 113
Before contacting a service center .......................... 115
Camera specifications ............................................. 118
Lens specifications .................................................. 122
Accessories (optional items) .................................... 123
Index ....................................................................... 125 Basic functions
Learn about your camera’s layout, icons, and basic functions for
shooting.
Unpacking …………………………………………………13
Title and role of each part ………………………………14
Preparations before shooting ……………………………18
Turning on the power and initialization …………………23
Option/menu selection method …………………………26
Setting the display and sound ……………………………28
Simple picture-taking method ……………………………31
Tips for getting a clearer photo …………………………3213
Unpacking
Check your product box for the following items.
Camera (Body cap,
eye-cup, Hot-shoe
cover included)
USB cable Battery Strap
Software installation
CD (including user's
manual)
Quick Start Manual Charger/AC power
cable
The actual components or optional parts may differ from the illustrations above.
For information about optional items, see “Accessories (optional items).” (p. 123)14
Title and role of each part
Mode dial (p. 5)
AF-assist light
/timer lamp (p. 61)
Power switch (p. 23)
Lens mount index
(p. 21)
Hot-shoe
cover (p. 58)
Strap holder
(p. 22)
Built-in flash
(p. 55)
Dial (p. 26)
Shutter button (p. 7)
Lens removal
Lens mount (p. 21) button (p. 21)
Flash button
(p. 55)
Depth preview button
(p. 37)
Hot-shoe (p. 58)
Green button*
Drive mode button (p. 73)
Diopter adjustment
dial (p. 16)
* Use the green button [ ].
The following setup values are initialized if the button is pushed once in the standby state
for shooting.
Program shift / Detailed setup of picture wizard / Fine tuning of white balance / Color Temp.
setting value / Adjusting the colors of screen menu / Timer / Flash EV / When selecting or setting
AF, shift the changed focus area to the center / Bracketing setup
Body cap (p. 21)
DC-IN port
HDMI port (p. 92)
Shutter release
connection port
USB/AV OUT Port
(p. 94)
Image Sensor15
Title and role of each part
AEL button (p. 77)
EV button (p. 43)
Eye-cup (p. 16)
Display
Viewfinder
Eye sensor*
DISP button (p. 28)
Function(Fn) button (p. 27)
Direction key (p. 5)
Delete/Picture wizard
button (p. 82)
Battery chamber
cover (p. 19)
Playback
button (p. 79)
Tripod mount
* Use of eye sensor
This product will automatically convert to EVF when the users try
to use the view-finder (EVF) by operating the eye sensor in Auto
Select mode and all the information will be shown on the viewfinder. Do not cover the eye sensor with your hands or materials.
Memory card
slot
Status lamp (p. 16)
Memory card cover
MENU button (p. 26)16
Title and role of each part
Diopter adjustment dial/Eye-cup/
Status lamp
Use of Diopter adjustment dial
It is possible to adjust the
viewfinder appropriate for the
eyesight of user.
If the image is not shown clearly
through the viewfinder, move
the eyesight adjustment dial in
the left/right direction to have a
clear view.
Eye-cup
Removal of Eye-cup
When the camera is shipped,
the eyecup is attached to the
viewfinder. Push the Eye-cup
up as shown in the figure for
removal.
Eyesight
adjustment dial
Status lamp
In the case of saving a picture or
shooting a movie, this shows the
operating status of the camera by
blinking the status indicator lamp
• Blinking: When saving photos,
recording movies, being read by
a computer or printer.
• Steady: When there is no data
transfer or when connecting to a
computer or printer is complete.
Status lamp17
Title and role of each part
Description for each part of the lens
When purchasing the lens separately, please contact a Samsung service center to verify the compatibility of the camera an lens.
This information in this user manual is based on the SAMSUNG 18-55mm F3.5-5.6 OIS lens. Please refer to the lens user manual
for more information about the lens.
•
•
Lens
contacts
Lens hood
mount
Zoom ring
Lens mount
connecting
point
OIS switch
(p. 35)
AF/MF switch
(p. 34)
Focus ring
(p. 33)
Lens
[SAMSUNG 18-55mm F3.5-5.6 OIS]
[SAMSUNG 30mm F2]
Focus ring
Lens
Lens mount
connecting
point18
Preparations before shooting
Charging the battery
Please charge the battery fully before using this
product.
Please make the connections as in the following figure.
Color of charge lamp Charging status
Red Charging
Green Fully charged
Turned off, or Yellow Charging error
To remove the battery from the charger, lift slightly in
the direction of the arrow.
Please use designated charger or batteries for proper
use. SAMSUNG is not responsible for any accident
that may occur from using a product other than
designated.
•
•
INSERT 1
2
INSERT
CHARGE AC power code
INSERT
Charging lamp
Charger19
Preparations before shooting
Installing the battery
When taking out the battery, pull down slightly on the
lock lever. You can then remove the battery. 2
Lock lever
1
Open by
pushing in the
direction of the
arrow
3
Close by
pushing down
in the direction
of the arrow.20
Preparations before shooting
Installing the memory card
To remove the memory card, push the card slightly in
the direction of insertion.
Please do not remove the memory card or battery
while the status indicator lamp is blinking. It may
cause loss of data of product damage.
•
•
1 3
2
After checking
the direction of
metal terminal,
you can insert
the memory
card.21
Preparations before shooting
Mounting/dismounting the lens
Please remove the lens mount cover and body cap
prior to the installation of lens.
After matching the lens mount index (red) of camera
body with the point (red) of lens mount, join the lens by
turning the lens clockwise until it clicks. When removing
the lens, turn the lens counter clockwise while holding
down the lens dismount button.
Before mounting the lens
Lens mounting
Dismounting the lens
Mounting or dismounting the lens while the
camera is powered off is desirable to ensure the
stable operation of the lens.
SAMSUNG is not responsible for any accident,
damage, or trouble caused by using other
company's lens.
The body cap protects the product from
scratches or dust when you transport it.
•
•
•
Change lenses in a clean, low dust environment.
Foreign particles inside the body or lens of the
camera can cause the camera to malfunction.
When mounting the lens, please do not touch
the inner part of the camera with your finger.
Dust or foreign particles inside the camera can
affect image quality or cause the camera to
malfunction.
•
•
Lens mount
connecting
point22
Preparations before shooting
Connecting the strap
Connecting the strap to the camera body so you can carry the camera easily.23
Turning on the power and initialization
When turning the power on/off, please set the power
switch to ON/OFF.
When you turn on the camera for the fi rst time, the
camera may ask you to set the language and date.
1 Press [T] to select Language, and then
press [ ].
2 Press [S/T/W/X] to select a language,
and then press [ ].
• The screen appears in the language you
selected.
3 Press [S/T] to select Date, and then
press [ ].
4 Press [S/T/W/X] to set the date, and
then press [ ].
MENU OK
2
Date
Time Zone
Time
Language
2010 1 1
00 : 00
English
Date & Time
MENU OK
2
Date
Time Zone
Time
Language
2010 1 1
00 : 00
English
Date & Time
MENU OK
2
Date
Time Zone
Time
Language
2010 1 1
00 : 00
English
Date & Time
Exit Change
Exit Change
Exit Change24
5 Press [T] to select Time Zone and then
press [ ].
6 Select a desired world time zone by
pressing [W/X].
7 To set daylight saving time, press [S].
Press [S] again to disable.
8 Press [ ] to save.
9
Press [T] to select Time, and then press
[ ].
10 Set desired time by pressing
[S/T/W/X], and then press [ ].
11 Press [MENU] to finish setting.
MENU OK
2
Date
Time Zone
Time
Language
2010 1 1
00 : 00
English
Date & Time
Exit Change
MENU
2
Time Zone
London
[GMT +00:00] 2010/01/01 01:10 AM
Back DST
Turning on the power and initialization25
Turning on the power and initialization
A
Information display
Shooting mode
Movie shooting mode
Focus checking
Flash
15 Shutter speed
F3.5 Aperture value
3
- +
2 23 1 1 0
Adjusted value of
exposure
AEL/AFL setting
0001 Possible no. of shots
Battery information
Displays no-insertion
of memory card
Warning of camera
shake
12:00AM 2010.01.01 Time, date and year info
Focus indicator
ମGGଯ Spot metering area
AF zone
Histogram
Grid display
B
Shooting option display(left)
14M Size
Movie size
SF Image quality
Movie quality
Focus area
Flash
Flash light adjustment
RGB Color space
Smart range
OIS OIS
Voice recording
Fader
Wind Cut
C
Shooting option display(right)
Drive mode
Timer
AF mode
White balance
White balance adjustment
ISO ISO
Metering option
Picture wizard
The display shows the icons for the currently selected option.
3
- +
2 23 1 1 0
15 F3.5 0001 A
C
AEL
AFL
12:00AM 2010.01.01 14M
SF
RGB
ISO
B
3
- +
2 1 1 0 2 3
15 F3.5 0001 AAEEELL
AFFFLL
12:00 12:0000
AMAM 2010.01.01 2010.01.01
OIS
Icons
All the details shown on the view finder will appear identically on the display.
By using the live view function, the user can take a picture conveniently without having to look through the viewfinder.
The icons shown on the screen are for when the OIS and AF/MF switches on the lens are in use.26
1 Press [MENU] in the Shooting mode.
2 You can select a desired option or menu
by pressing [S/T/W/X] or [ ].
3 To save a selected option or menu, press [ ].
Return to the previous screen
To return to the previous menu screen, press [MENU].
Using the dial
The user may change the menu setting's value by either
using the dial or move the menu screen to a desired
direction. For example when taking a picture in the
shutter speed priority mode, this allows you to quickly
adjust the desired shutter speed.
Example. Using the dial in the S mode
1 Set the Mode dial to S.
2 Adjust the shutter speed by turning the
dial.
• The camera sets aperture value
automatically according to the shutter
speed you set.
Option/menu selection method
After pressing [MENU], you can select an option or menu by pressing [S/T] or [ ].
The user can return to the state of shooting by pressing
[Shutter].
AF MF
WB
ISO
AF/MF setting, Menu navigation (S)
ISO setting, Menu navigation (T)
White balance
setting, Menu
navigation (X)
Metering
method
setting,
Menu
navigation
(W)
OK button,
Setting Selection AF27
Using [Fn]
By pressing the [Fn] function button, you can easily access
major functions such as Quality, Size, AF area, Flash, Color
Space, Smart Range, and OIS.
Example. Flash setting in the P mode
1 Set the Mode dial to P.
2 Press the [Fn] button on the body of
camera.
3 Select Flash using the [W/X] or dial.
4 Press [S].
5 Set the flash menu option using the [W/X]
or dial.
6 Press [S].
7 Set the flash intensity using the [W/X] or
dial.
• You can adjust the intensity of the flash by
±2 levels.
8 Align your subject in the frame and halfpress [Shutter] to focus.
9 Press [Shutter] to take a photo.
Option/menu selection method
Displays the
level of flash
intensity
adjustment
Flash
14M SF RGB OIS
Fill in
14M SF RGB OIS28
Setting the display and sound
Learn how to change basic display and sound settings according to your preferences.
Changing the display type
You can select the icons and options the camera
displays in the Shooting and Play modes by selecting a
Display Type.
Press [DISP] repeatedly.
Shooting
mode
Display all the shooting information except for
User Display setting values.
Display all the shooting modes set by user. (p. 29)
Hide all the information except for shooting
mode, shutter speed, aperture value, exposure,
number of available shots, and battery
information.
•
•
•
Playback
mode
Display the shooting meta information.
Display the RGB histogram, currently selected
histogram option, and date set.
Display shutter speed, aperture value, ISO, file in
play, and total number of files saved.
•
•
•
Viewing the function descriptions of menu
1 In the Shooting mode, press [MENU].
2 Select a menu option.
• Press and hold [DISP]. The function
descriptions of the menu appears on the
screen.
?
Resolution and H/V ratio of images can be set.
Photo Size
DISP
AF - MF
WB
ISO
DISP button
3
- +
2 2 1 1 0 3
14M
SF
RGB
ISO
20 F3.7 0001
09:45 2010.01.01
OIS29
Setting the display and sound
Setting user display
You can add or remove shooting information from the
display.
1 Press [MENU] in the shooting mode.
2 Select User setup ( 1) → User Display
→ an option.
About histogram
A histogram is a graph that shows the brightness
distribution of picture. This represents a dark picture
if the graph is inclined to the left and if the graph is
leaning to the right, this represents a bright picture. The
height of graph is related to the color information and
the graph gets higher if a specific color is distributed
more.
▲Insufficient exposure ▲Balanced exposure ▲Excessive exposure
Setting the sound
You can set the sound the camera makes when you
press the OK button.
1 In Shooting or Playback mode, press
[MENU].
2 Select Setting2(
2) → Sound →
System Volume → an option.
Off
The camera makes no sound
when you press [ ].
Low, Medium, High
The camera makes a signal
sound when you press [ ].
3 Press [MENU] to return to the previous
mode.
3
- +
2 23 1 1 0
14M
RGB
20 F3.7 0001
09:45 2010.01.01
Icon
09:45 009:45 5 2010.01.01 2010 01 010.01.0101
SF
3
- +
2 1 1 0 2 3
20 F3.7 0001
14M
RGB
SFF
Histogram
Grid
Icon
ISO
OIS30
Setting the screen display
The screen display can be set according to the user’s
convenience.
1 In Shooting or Playback mode,
press [MENU].
2 Select Setting3 ( 3) → Display Select
3 Select a desired option.
Auto Select Convert between Main Display and EVF by
eye sensor
Main Display The screen will be shown only through
Main Display
EVF The screen will be shown only through
EVF
MENU OK
1 2 1 1 2 3
Display Select
Video Out
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
HDMI Size
Firmware Update
Auto
NTSC
On
Auto
3
Auto Select
Main Display
EVF
Back Set
Setting the display and sound31
1 Rotate the mode dial to .
2 Align your subject in the frame.
All the details shown on the view finder will
appear identically on the display.
3 Half-press [Shutter] to focus.
4 Press [Shutter] to take a photo.
Simple picture-taking method
Using the Smart Auto mode, you can take a picture easily with minimum setup.
• Please refer to the "Tips for getting a clearer
photo" (p. 32) to take a clear picture.
• Press [ ] to see the saved images on the
screen.
● Green: Focus is set.
● Red: Focus is not set.
14M
RGB
WHITE 0001
OIS
14M
SMART
RGB
WHITE 0001
OIS32
Holding your camera correctly
Please make sure
that your hand,
hair, and strap do
not interfere with
the lens or flash.
Image stabilization
Half-pressing the shutter button
In order to check in
advance whether the
focus of composition is set
appropriately, please use
the half-shutter function. If
you press the shutter halfway down, the focus and
exposure will be adjusted
automatically.
In order to check in
advance whether the
focus of composition is set
appropriately, please use
the half-shutter function. If
you press the shutter halfway down, the focus and
exposure will be adjusted
automatically.
Tips for getting a clearer photo
Shows the shutter
speed and aperture
value being set.
Focus frame
If green, take
the picture by
pressing the
[Shutter].
If red, either
change the
composition or
adjust the focus
again since the
focus is not
correctly set.
•
•
To avoid the blurring effect of
camera shake, set the optical
Image Stabilization (OIS)
function. (p.35)
•
3
- +
2 2 1 1 0 3
14M
SF
RGB
ISO
125 F3.5 0001
OIS33
Under the following circumstances, it may be difficult to
get your subject in focus:
When the color contrast is not clear
(When someone is wearing clothes similar in color to the background)
When the subject is in front of a strong backlight
When the subject generates strong reflected light
When there is a horizontally repeated line pattern (window blinds, etc.)
When the subject is not located in the center
When there is a flat white wall behind the subject which does not have
specific patterns.
When there is a fast moving subject.
When the subject is too close to the camera.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Using the manual focus
If the auto focus function does not operate normally
due to the environmental factors, your can set the lens
to Manual Focus (MF) and adjust the focus manually.
When the lens’ focus method is set to Manual Focus
(MF), this function helps focus the subject by expanding
the screen automatically. If the focus is adjusted by
using the expanded image, the focus can be adjusted
more accurately.(p. 63)
Getting your subject in focus
Please try to use the focus lock function.
Adjust the focus by using the half-shutter function where the
camera can focus easily. Then, simply press the [Shutter]
button after moving the camera to a desired composition. Keep
pressing and holding down the half-shutter until you actually
make a photo shot.
Under the half-shutter state, press the [AEL] button of the
camera to fix the exposure value and focus information at the
same time according to the setting. To cancel the function, press
the [AEL] button once more. (p. 77)
• Use the [AF/MF] control switch on the lens to
switch the camera to manual focus.
• If the lens doesn't have an AF/MF switch, you
may be able to select Manual Focus in the AF
mode menu
• The availability of this option differs, depending
on the lens you are using.
• When you adjust the focus manually, the picture
may appear blurred if you don't set the focus
accurately. Take pictures after setting the focus
accurately.
• When using the manual focus function,
the AF Area is not available to use.
• In the movie shooting mode, you can not set
the focus by using the expanded image.34
Setting the automatic/manual focus function
You can set the camera to adjust focus automatically
or manually by using the AF/MF switch on the side of
the lens.
1
Using automatic focus
Set the AF/MF switch of the lens to AF.
The focus adjusts automatically when you
press the shutter button half way down.
2
Using manual focus
Set the AF/MF switch of the lens to MF.
You can adjust the focus manually by
turning the focus ring.
Zooming
Using the zoom ring, you can enlarge (telephoto angle)
or reduce (wide angle) the size of an image by changing
the focal length value of the camera lens.
Adjust the image to the desired size, and then take a
picture.
1
Check the focus, and then turn the zoom ring
to the left/right.
The focal length of the lens changes and the
subject appears enlarged or reduced.
2
Half-press [Shutter] to focus.
3
Press [Shutter] to take a photo.
Since the focus can change slightly when you zoom in or
out, we recommend you adjust the focus again prior to
taking a picture.
Some lens models do not have the AF/MF switch. Please
consider this when purchasing a lens. (p.60)35
Optical Image Stabilization (OIS)
Use the optical image stabilization (OIS) function when
taking pictures to minimize camera shake and improve
focus.
▲ Before applying OIS ▲ After applying OIS
Using the OIS switch of lens
The OIS function can be used only in the case that the
lens in use has the OIS function.
To use this function, please set [OIS] to ON.
ON
OIS
OFF36
Using the OIS in the menu option
After setting the OIS switch, select the OIS function in
the menu option
1 In Shooting mode, press [MENU].
2 Select Shooting3 (
3/
3) → OIS →
an option.
OIS Mode 1 The OIS function is applied only when
pressing the shutter in full or half.
OIS Mode 2 The OIS function is always applied.
The OIS function may not work well in the following
situations:
When you take a picture while tracing a moving
object
When a big vibration occurs beyond the range of
stabilization
When the shutter speed is too slow due to a
circumstance like night shooting
When the battery capacity is not sufficient
When you are shooting a close-up shot
When you use a tripod, please disable the OIS
function since the image can be shaken due to the
vibration of OIS function.
If the camera is struck or dropped while you are
taking a picture, the display can be impaired. If this
occurs, turn the camera off and then on, and the
camera should operate normally again.
Since the battery consumption can increase along
with the use of OIS function, it is recommended to
use the function only if needed.
To set the OIS function by using the menu, set
[OIS] of lens to ON. This function may not operate
depending on the lens model.
The function can be set directly by pressing [Fn] in
the shooting mode.
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
•
•
•
•37
Depth preview
When you are not using the depth preview function, you can only see the subject through the camera in the condition of
the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) in the shooting mode.
Use the Depth of Field Preview function before taking a picture to view the depth of field of the scene as it looks with
the lens set to its current f-stop number.
1 Press the [Depth Preview] in the Shooting
mode.
2 You can check the depth of field result
actually taken through the display and
viewfinder.
What is the depth of field?
When you focus on a specific subject, there is a range
in which objects closer and further away are all in focus.
This focused range is called the depth of field.
The wider the wide-angle lens, the higher the aperture
value, the greater the depth of field.
For example, the aperture stop, f 11 is higher than f 2.8.
Current position of the subject
Current position of the subject
10 meters 6 meters 4 meters 2 meters 1 meters
10 meters 6 meters 4 meters 2 meters 1 meters
S This refer to an appropriate range of
focus when the depth of field is deep.
S This refer to an appropriate range of
focus when the depth of field is shallow.
You can set the function of a button differently by using the
Key Mapping menu option. (p. 77)
Depth
preview
buttonBasic shooting
Learn how to take a photo by selecting a mode and how to record a video.
Using the Smart Auto mode ………………………… 39
Using the Program mode …………………………… 40
Using the Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority,
or Manual mode ……………………………………… 41
Using the Night/Portrait/Landscapee mode ……… 45
Using the Scene mode ……………………………… 46
Recording a Movie …………………………………… 4839
Using the Smart Auto mode
The smart auto mode allows taking pictures under an optimized condition since the camera recognizes various
photographing conditions automatically. Therefore, even a beginner can use the camera easily.
1 Rotate the mode dial to .
2 Align your subject in the frame.
• The camera automatically detects the type
of scene and displays the corresponding
scene icon in the display.
Outdoor landscape shot
Highly bright background shot
Night landscape shot
Outdoor portrait shot at night
Backlight landscape shot without a man
Portrait shot under backlight
Portrait shot
Close-up shot
Close-up character shot
Sunset shot
Blue sky shot
Nature shot such as forest and leaves
Close-up shot for the subject with various colors
Close-up portrait shot
With the camera on a tripod, a shot of a subject
that does not move for a period of time.
Shot of fast moving subject or subject that moves
frequently.
3 Half-press [Shutter] to focus.
4 Press [Shutter] to take a photo.
If the camera does not detect a type of scene, it
takes pictures with the basic settings of the
mode. .
Even if it detcts a face, the camera may not select
portrait mode because of the orientation and
brightness of the face.
The camera may not recognize a scene because of
adverse photograph conditions such as bad lighting,
camera shake, and subject distance.
The camera may not recognize the mode, even
it the camera is on a tripod, depending on the
movement of the subject.
•
•
•
•
The camera
displays the scene
icon corresponding
to the scene it
detects.
14M
SMART
RGB
WHITE
14M
0001
OIS40
Using the Program mode
In the program mode, the camera automatically adjusts the shutter speed and aperture value to maintain the correct
exposure.
1 Rotate the mode dial to P.
2 Set options.
• For a list of options, refer to “Extended
shooting functions.”(p. 50)
3 Align your subject in the frame and halfpress [Shutter] to focus.
4 Press [Shutter] to take a photo.
What is the program shift method?
If this function is used, desired shutter speed and
aperture value can be selected while maintaining the
same brightness. The shutter speed and aperture value
are changed as in the following rules.
The available aperture numbers for exposure setting is
different depending on the lens model.
Dial direction Changing the exposure value
Left Decreased shutter speed + increased
aperture
Right Increased shutter speed + decreased
aperture 3
- +
2 2 1 1 0 3
14M
SF
RGB
ISO
15 F3.5 0001
OIS41
Using the Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, or Manual mode
By using the aperture value of adjusting light volume and shutter speed, you can take pictures of desired exposure.
As for the shooting modes that allows adjusting the aperture value and shutter speed, there are the aperture priority
mode, shutter speed priority mode, and manual mode.
Using the Aperture Priority mode
The Aperture Priority mode lets you to set the aperture
value manually while the camera automatically selects
an appropriate shutter speed.
1 Rotate the Mode dial to A.
2 Rotate the dial to adjust the aperture
value.
3 Set options.
• For a list of options, refer to “Extended
shooting functions.”(p. 50)
4 Align your subject in the frame and halfpress [Shutter] to focus.
5 Press [Shutter] to take a photo.
Aperture value
The aperture value of a lens can be adjusted to control
the amount of light reaching the image sensor. When
opening the aperture (reduce the aperture value),
objects closer and further away than the focused
subject will be out of focus. When closing the aperture
(increase the aperture value), the range in focus
expands forward and backward.
▲ Increased aperture
value (narrower opening)
▲ Reduced aperture
value (wider opening)
3
- +
2 23 1 1 0
14M
20 F3.5 0001
SF
RGB
ISO
A
OIS
F442
Using the Shutter Priority mode
The Shutter Priority mode lets you set the shutter speed
manually while the camera automatically selects an
appropriate aperture value.
1 Rotate the Mode dial to S.
2 Rotate the dial to adjust the shutter
speed.
3 Set options.
• For a list of options, refer to “Extended
shooting functions.”(p. 50)
4 Align your subject in the frame and halfpress [Shutter] to focus.
5 Press [Shutter] to take a photo.
Shutter speed
Shutter speed is the length of time the shutter is open.
You can creat many interesting effects by adjusting the
shutter speed. A low shutter speed blurs motion on the
image. You can feel the speed in the picture when the
low shutter speed is used for a shot.
A fast shutter speed is essential for capturing the
movement. A faster shutter speed froze the subject in
its movement.
▲ Slow shutter speed ▲ Fast shutter speed
Using the Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, or Manual mode
3
- +
2 23 1 1 0
14M
SF
RGB
ISO
S 250 F3.7 0001
OIS43
Using the Manual mode
In the manual mode, you can take pictures by setting
various shot options directly including the shutter speed
and aperture value.
1 Rotate the Mode dial to M.
2 Rotate the dial to adjust the shutter
speed.
3 Rotate the dial to adjust the aperture value
while press and hold the [EV].
4 Set desired shooting options.
• For a list of options, refer to “Extended
shooting functions.”(p. 50)
5 Align your subject in the frame and halfpress [Shutter] to focus.
6 Press [Shutter] to take a photo.
Using the Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, or Manual mode
EV button
Dial In the P (Program), S (Shutter Priority), or A (Aperture
Priority) modes, when a value appears in red, it is
outside the range of values that produces good
pictures.
P mode: Shutter speed and aperture value can
appear in red.
S mode: Shutter speed can appear in red.
A mode: Aperture value can appear in red.
The camera can not set the ISO speed automatically
in the M (manual) mode.
•
•44
Using the bulb exposure
By using the bulb exposure, you can set the shutter
speed as long as you want.
1 Rotate the Mode dial to M.
2 Rotate the dial and set the shutter speed
to Bulb.
• Bulb exposure indication appears next to
the shutter speed of 30"(seconds).
3 To adjust the aperture value, press and
hold the [EV] while rotating the dial.
4 Align your subject in the frame and halfpress [Shutter] to focus.
5 Press [Shutter] to take a photo.
• The exposure time continues until you
finish holding the [Shutter]. Press and
hold the [Shutter] for desired time. As
soon as you finish holding the [Shutter],
the shooting is complete.
Using the Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, or Manual mode
To improve image stability in the Bulb Exposure
mode, we recommend you use a reliable tripod or
shutter release (purchased separately).
With long exposures, the time the camera takes
to save images gets longer as well. This is not a
problem with the product and you do not need to
replace the battery.
Before using Bulb Exposure to take long exposures,
we recommend you fully charging the battery.
When you use Bulb Exposure to take long exposures,
visual noise can occur. To control visual noise, we
recommend you turn the Noise Reduction function
on. The Noise Reduction function operates when the
shutter exposure exceeds 1 seconds.
When you use Bulb Exposure, the Successive
Shooting function is unavailable.
When you use Bulb Exposure, you can not set the
ISO Speed to AUTO.
•
•
•
•
•
•
14M
SF
RGB
ISO
Bulb F3.5 00'00'' 0173
OIS45
Using the night mode
Night mode provides the optimal exposure settings for
dark or night time environments.
1
Rotate the Mode dial to .
2 Align your subject in the frame and halfpress [Shutter] to focus.
3 Press [Shutter] to take a photo.
Using the portrait mode
In Portrait mode, the camera automatically sets optimal
portrait shot settings.
1
Rotate the Mode dial to .
2 Align your subject in the frame and halfpress [Shutter] to focus.
3 Press [Shutter] to take a photo.
Using the landscape mode
Landscape mode provides the optimal exposure and
focus settings for natural landscapes.
1
Rotate the mode dial to .
2 Align your subject in the frame and halfpress [Shutter] to focus.
3 Press [Shutter] to take a photo.
Using the Night/Portrait/Landscape mode
When you use Night mode, we recommended you
also use a tripod, shutter release, or Timer function
(purchased separately) to minimize camera shake.
In the portrait mode, the focus area is automatically
set to the face as it is set to the Face Detection
AF mode automatically.
In the landscape mode, the camera adjusts shutter
speed automatically according to the aperture
value.
We recommend you use a tripod in case the
camera selects a slow shutter speed setting.46
1
Rotate the Mode dial to .
2 Select a scene.
x Press [MENU] to select a scene. You can
select a desired scene.
x For the Beauty Shot mode, see “Using the
Beauty Shot mode.”
3 Align your subject in the frame and halfpress [Shutter] to focus.
4 Press [Shutter] to take a photo.
If you have the camera set to Standby mode and the Mode
dial set to , you can directly select a desired scene by
pressing [Fn].
Using the Scene mode
Since an appropriate option is set in advance by the scene, the shot can be taken conveniently by selecting a scene
appropriate for the situation.
MENU OK
1 Beauty Shot
Back Set47
Using the Beauty Shot mode
In the beauty shot mode, you can take pictures with
options that make faces appear smooth and blemishfree.
1 Rotate the Mode dial to .
2 Press [MENU].
3 Select Shooting1 ( 1) → SCENE →
Beauty Shot.
4 Select Shooting3 ( 3) → Face Tone.
5 Set options.
x Select a higher setting to make skin tone
appear lighter.
6 Select Shooting3 ( 3) → Face
Retouch.
7 Set options.
x Select a higher setting to make skin tone
appear lighter.
8 Align your subject in the frame and halfpress [Shutter] to focus.
9 Press [Shutter] to take a photo.
MENU OK
1 2 3 1 1 2 3
Face Tone
Face Retouch
OIS
Level 1
In the Beauty Shot mode, AF area is set to Face
Detection AF or Self-Portrait AF.
Using the Scene mode
MENU OK
1 2 3 1 1 2 3
Face Tone
Face Retouch
OIS
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Back Set
Back Set
Level 1
Level 2
Level 348
Recording a Movie
In the movie shooting mode, you can shoot videos in High Definition quality (1280x720). You can continue recording
movies up to 25 minutes. The recorded video is saved as an H.264 (MPEG-4.AVC) file.
1 Rotate the Mode dial to .
2 Press [MENU].
3 Select Shooting1 ( 1) → Quality.
4 Set options.
5 Select Shooting3 ( 3) → Voice.
6 Select whether to record sound.
7 Press [Shutter] to start recording.
8 Press [Shutter] again to stop recording.
Setting the aperture value
You can set the aperture value when shooting a movie.
1 In Shooting mode, press [MENU].
2 Select Shooting1 ( 1) → Movie AE
Mode → an option.
P Program
The aperture value is adjusted
automatically.
A Aperture Priority
Set the aperture value by using the
dial before taking the movie.
To fade out the screen
You can make the movie screen darker or brighter
gradually in recording by using the fader function.
1 In Shooting mode, press [MENU].
2 Select Shooting3 ( 3) → Fader.
Off Fader function not used
In Scene gradually fades in when recording starts.
Out Scene gradually fades out when recording
ends
In-Out The fader function is applied at the start and end
of the scene
Movie frame speed is fixed at 30 fps (30 frames/sec).
While shooting a movie, push the [Depth Preview]
button once to activate the AF function and once
again to cancel the function. This function may not
work depending on the lens you are using.
•
•
REC
WWaWX 01:00
3
- +
2 23 1 1 0
F3.5 01:0049
Recording a Movie
Using the Wind Cut
Use the wind noise removal function to remove some
surrounding noise in addition to the wind noise.
1 In the Shooting mode, press [MENU].
2 Select Shooting3 ( 3) → Wind Cut →
an option.
Pause while recording a movie
By using the pause function, you can shoot only
desired scenes into one file without generating several
movie files.
To pause during the recording, press [ ].
• To continue on recording, press [ ] again.
H.264 (MPEG-4 part10/AVC) is the latest video
coding format established in 2003 collaboratively by
ISO-IEC and ITU-T. Since this format uses a high
compression rate, more data can be saved in less
memory space.
When using a slow writing memory card, your
movie's recording can be interrupted because the
card can not process data at the rate the video is
being shot. If this occurs, replace the card with a
faster memory card or reduce the image size.
If you have the image stabilizer option on when
shooting a movie, the camera may record the image
stabilizer sound.
When the size of a movie file exceeds 4GB, the
camera automatically stops recording. If this occurs,
continue the movie by starting a new movie file.
When formatting a memory card, always format using
this camera. If you format on another camera or a
PC, you can cause a change in the capacity of the
card or make it incompatible with your camera.
If you remove the camera lens while recording a movie,
the recording will be interrupted. Do not change the lens
while recording.
While you shoot a movie, the camera can record
the sounds of the zoom mechanism working and
the sounds the camera makes when you press the
buttons.
If you change the shooting angle of the camera
suddenly while shooting a movie, the camera may not
be able to record images accurately. We recommend
using a tripod when shooting a movie. In this way, you
can minimize camera shake.
In the Movie Shooting mode, the camera supports only
the Multi AF function. You can not use any other focus
area setting functions, such as Face Detection AF.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
When you use the Fader function, it may takes longer
to save images.
•Extended shooting
functions
Learn about the options you can set in shooting mode.
By using the shooting options, you can enjoy more customized pictures
and movies.
Setting the resolution and quality …………………… 51
Using the timer function ……………………………… 54
Taking a picture in the dark place …………………… 55
Focusing methods …………………………………… 60
Face detection ………………………………………… 64
Brightness and color adjustment of picture ………… 66
Changing the shooting method ……………………… 73
Special effect/photo retouching ……………………… 75
Key Mapping …………………………………………… 77 51
Setting a resolution
To capture the high level of detail and excellent image
quality in your picture or video, it is a good idea to
set the resolution to the highest setting. The main
drawback is that the file size becomes relatively big.
Setting picture resolution
1 In Shooting mode, press [MENU].
2 Select Shooting 1 (
1) → Photo Size →
an option.
Picture size
(display ratio) Proper use
14M
4592 x 3056
(3:2)
For printing photos on A1 size
prints.
10M
3872 x 2592
(3:2)
For printing photos on A2 size
prints.
6M
3008 x 2000
(3:2)
For printing photos on A3 size
prints.
2M
1920 x 1280
(3:2)
For printing photos on A5 size
prints.
4592 x 2584
(16:9)
When outputting to HDTV (16:9)
or printing A1 size prints.
3872 x 2176
(16:9)
When outputting to HDTV (16:9)
or printing A3 size prints.
3008 x 1688
(16:9)
When outputting to HDTV (16:9)
or printing A4 size prints.
1920 x 1080
(16:9)
When outputting to HDTV (16:9)
or printing A5 size prints.
Setting video resolution
1 Press [MENU] in the Video Shooting
mode.
2 Select Shooting 1 (
1) → Movie Size →
an option.
1280
(16:9) When outputting to HDTV
640 640
(4:3) When outputting to normal TV
320 320
(4:3) When uploading and using on the web
Setting the resolution and quality
You can also set the Resolution function by pressing [Fn] in the shooting mode.52
Setting the image quality of a picture
The camera saves pictures in either in the JPEG or RAW
format.
The compression ratio is reduced as the image quality
gets better. It is necessary to increase the file size to have
a better quality picture.
1 In Shooting mode, press [MENU].
2 Select Shooting 1 (
1) → Quality →
an option.
SF Super Fine Set to super fine quality
F Fine Set to fine quality
N Normal Set to normal quality
RAW RAW Save in the RAW file format
RAW
S.FINE S.Fine+RAW Save super-fine image and RAW file at
the same time
RAW
FINE Fine+RAW Save fine image and RAW file at the same time
RAW
NORMAL Normal+RAW Save normal image and RAW file at the same time
Setting the quality of a movie
The camera saves movies in normal or high quality.
1 In the Shooting mode, press [MENU].
2 Select Shooting1 (
1) → Quality → an
option.
Normal Set normal quality
HQ Set high quality
• The camera saves RAW fi le format images without
data loss and only in the 14M (4592 x 3056) photo
size. Although settings for white balance, contrast,
saturation, and sharpness, etc. are not reflected
in the image, they are saved as information. If you
want to save the RAW data into an image fi le format
such as JPEG or TIFF, use the provided software
(SAMSUNG RAW Converter). RAW fi les have an
"SRW" extension. (For example: “SAM_9999.SRW”)
Setting the resolution and quality
You can also set the Quality function by pressing [Fn] in the shooting mode.53
Noise reduction
This function can be set to reduce the noise in pictures.
1 In the Shooting mode, press [MENU].
2
Select User setup (
1) → Noise
Reduction → an option.
High ISO NR
This function reduces noise that
may occur when you set a highspeed ISO (3200).
Long Term
NR
This function reduces noise when
you set the camera for a long
exposure (over 1 seconds). It
requires additional processing
time equal to the shutter speed
you used to take the picture.
Setting the resolution and quality
When the Noise reduction function is disabled,
there might be a noise in the recorded picture.54
Setting the timer function
1 In the Shooting mode, press [MENU].
2 Select Shooting 2 (
2) → Drive.
3 Press [Fn] after selecting Timer.
4 Select the operation time by rotating the
dial or pressing [W / X].
• You can select the timer setting from
2 ~ 30 seconds.
5 The shot is taken automatically after the
time being set has passed by pressing
[Shutter].
Using the timer function
The function can be set directly by pressing [ ] in the shooting mode.
To cancel the self timer function, press [ ] one
more time, or press [Shutter].
MENU
2
Timer
Back Reset55
Using the flash popup button
The flash operates when you pop-up the built-in flash
by pressing the flash button. When the flash is closed,
it will not burst out the light and the , , ,
and modes support automatic popup and flash light.
1 In the Shooting mode, press [ ].
2 Align your subject in the frame and halfpress [Shutter] to focus.
3
Press [Shutter] to take a photo.
• Even if you have opened the flash using
the 'Flash' button, the flash will not work if
you have the Flash Option in the menu set
to Off.
Setting the flash option
If a picture is taken in a dark place, the picture may
appear to be dark since the light source is not sufficient.
Press [ ] to pop up the flash.
1 In the Shooting mode, press [MENU].
2 Select Shooting 2 (
2) →Flash→
an option.
Off The flash light doesn't operate.
SMART Smart Flash
The camera automatically adjusts the brightness
of the flash according to the amount of light in the
surrounding environment.
Auto The flash light operates automatically in the dark place.
Auto+Red The flash light operates automatically and
prevents the red-eye effect.
Fill in
• The flash operates whenever you take a picture.
• The brightness of the flash is automatically
controlled.
Fill-in Red The flash operates whenever you take a picture
and prevents the red-eye effect.
1st Curtain The flash operates immediately after the shutter
opens.
2nd Curtain The flash operates just before the shutter closes.
• You can take a better picture if the subject is
located within the operational range of the flash.
(Refer to the Guide Number in “Specification,”)
• You can set the auto flash option for external
flashes on the NX-series models only.
• The flash options available differ, depending on
the shooting modes.
Flash button
Taking a picture in a dark place
The function can be set directly by pressing [Fn] in the shooting mode.56
Using the red-eye fix function
When you take a portrait using the flash, the bright
burst of light can cause the red-eye effect. To prevent
the red eye effect, set the flash option to Auto+Red or
Fill-in Red.
1st Curtain, 2nd Curtain
The following images were obtained by taking the
pictures of straight-moving subject along with the
respective options of 1st Curtain and 2nd Curtain. In
case of using the 1st Curtain flash function, the front
part of action is remained clearly since the flash will
burst light immediately upon shutter opening. Since the
flash bursts the light at a later time when having used
the 2nd Curtain option, the picture expresses the last
image of the subject clearly.
Ball moving direction Ball moving direction
S Use of early 1st
Curtain option
S Use of 2nd Curtain
option
Taking a picture in a dark place
• When you set the red-eye fix function, the
camera prevents red-eye by emitting a
preliminary flash prior to the brighter flash it
emits when capturing the image.
• When the subject is moving or is far away from
the camera at the time of the preliminary flash,
the function may not function well.57
Adjusting the amount of flash light
When setting a fl ash option, you can adjust the
brightness of the flash.
1 In the Shooting mode, press [MENU].
2 Select Shooting 2 (
2) → Flash.
3 Press the [Fn] button after selecting a
desired item.
4 Adjust the brightness of the fl ash by
rotating the dial or pressing [W / X].
• You can adjust fl ash brightness by ±2
levels.
Taking a picture in a dark place
• If the subject is too close, the ISO sensitivity is
high, or the exposure value is too large or small,
the adjustment effect will be reduced.
• The Flash Brightness Adjustment function is not
available in some shooting modes.
• If an external fl ash unit has a flash control
function, the light control value of the external
flash is applied when you connect it to the
camera.
• If the distance from the subject is quite close
when taking images by using the built-in flash,
part of the images may appear dark as the lens
is interfered with the flash light. Please check
the distance between camera and subject when
taking pictures. The distance interfered with
flash light may vary by the type of lens in use.
• If you've installed a lens hood, the hood can
block light from the built-in flash. Please remove
the lens hood when using the built-in flash.
MENU
1
Flash Exposure Value
Back Reset
Display
the level of
flash light
adjustment 58
Using an external flash unit
(purchased separately)
You can use the A-TTL auto fl ash mode when you
attach an external fl ash unit (SEF20A or SEF42A) to
the camera.
This section of the user manual was prepared based on
the model SEF20A flash.
For more details about the external fl ash units, see the
flash units user’s manual.
Installing the flash
1 Install the external fl ash after removing
the hot shoe cover.
2 Turn on the external fl ash.
• The burst mode of external flash is set to
the TTL auto mode.
3 Make sure the external flash is fully
charged, and then start shooting.
The available flash modes
The flash modes available are determined by the
camera lens or camera exposure mode you are using.
1
Smart Flash Mode
• The camera automatically adjusts the
brightness of the flash according to amount of
light in the surrounding environment.
2
Auto
• The flash operates automatically in dim or dark
light.
3
Auto + Red
• The flash operates automatically in dim or dark
light and prevents the red-eye effect.
4 Fill in
• The flash operates whenever you take a picture
and its brightness is controlled automatically.
5 Fill-in Red
• Always operates the flash light, and prevents
the red-eye effect.
6 1st Curtain
• The flash operates immediately after the shutter
opens.
7 2nd Curtain
• The flash operates just before the shutter
closes.
Taking a picture in a dark place
• Only a fl ash device manufactured for the NX series
automatically adjusts the brightness of the flash. To
enjoy the auto mode functions, please use the flash
manufactured for NX models. Although the flash fires
without the battery being fully charged, we recommend
using the fl ash only after you charge the battery fully.
• If an external flash unit has a flash control function,
the light control value of the external flash is applied
when you connect it to the camera.59
Adjusting the ISO sensitivity
The ISO sensitivity, as the film sensitivity established
by the international standards organization (ISO),
represents the degree of reaction when camera
receives light. Since it reacts more sensitively with
greater ISO value, a natural shot can be obtained in a
dark place by raising the ISO value. This reduces the
degree of camera shaking with faster shutter speed.
1 In the Shooting mode, press [MENU].
2 Select Shooting 1 (
1) → ISO →
an option.
Taking a picture in a dark place
• The higher the ISO speed you select, the more
visual noise you may get.
• When the noise reduction function is used, the
noise caused by the high-sensitive ISO(3200)
can be reduced.
• The available ISO setting options may differ
depending on the Shooting mode.
• You can set the ISO directly by pressing [ISO] in
the Shooting mode.60
Focusing methods
Changing the Focusing methods
You can select a focusing method appropriate to the
subject you are photographing.
1 In the Shooting mode, press [MENU].
2 Select Shooting 2 (
2/
2) → AF Mode
→ an option.
Single AF When you press [shutter] half way
down, the focus fixes in one position.
Continuous
AF
When you hold the [shutter] half-way
down, the focus adjusts continually as
the subject changes position.
Manual
Focus
Adjust the focus manually by turning
the focus ring.
AF Priority
When you use the AF focusing function, the AF Priority
function prevents the shutter from fi ring if the focus is
not appropriately set.
1 In the Shooting mode, press [MENU].
2 Select Shooting 2 (
2) → AF Priority →
an option.
Off Camera takes a shot regardless of the focus.
On
The camera takes a shot only if the focus is set
correctly when you press the shutter button.
Even if the focus is set correctly when you
press the shutter half way, the camera will not
take the shot if the focus is not set correctly
when you press the shutter button fully.
• If your lens has an [AF/MF] switch, you can set the
lens to MF and adjust the focus manually.
• If there is no AF/MF switch on the lens, you can
switch to manual focus by selecting Manual Focus
in the AF mode menu.
• The selectable option may differ according to the
lens in use.
• When adjusting the focus manually, the picture may
appear blurred if you don't set the focus accurately.
Please take a picture after setting the focus accurately.
(p. 32).
• You can also set the AF/MF function directly by
pressing [ ] on top of the directional button
while in Shooting mode.
Even with AF Priority on, the Continuous and the Burst
Shot options let the shutter fi re whether the focus is set
correctly or not.61
Focusing methods
Using the AF assist light
The auto focus functions more accurately in dark
places when the AF assist light is on.
1 In the Shooting mode, press [MENU].
2 Select User setup ( 1) → AF Lamp.
Off AF assist light not used
On AF assist light turns on when light
is not sufficient.
Changing the focus area
The AF Area function changes the positions of the
focus area or areas and can give you clearer, sharper
pictures.
1 In the Shooting mode, press [MENU].
2 Select Shooting 2 (
2) →AF Area→ an
option.
Selection
AF
Sets the focus appropriately for an
area you have selected.
Multi AF
Displays a green rectangle in all
the Face places where focus is set
correctly.
Face
Detection
AF
Shows the areas that the focus is
correctly set in the display.
SelfPortrait AF
When the sound effect is heard at the
time of self-shot, you can check the
position of the subject’s face.
• The available options may differ by Shooting
mode.
• When you set the AF/MF switch on the lens to
MF, you can not change the AF area using the
Shooting menu.
• When you select the Multi AF function, the AF
areas that are in focus appear in green.
• You can select this function directly by pressing
[Fn] in the Shooting mode. 62
Setting the focus of the selected area
In the shooting composition, a shot may be taken by
setting the focus to the area desired by user.
1 In the Shooting mode, press [MENU].
2 Select Shooting 2 (
2) → AF Area →
Selection AF.
3 Press [MENU] to return to the previous
mode.
4 In the Shooting mode, press [ ].
5 Press [S/T/W/X] to move the focus
area.
6 Adjust the size of focus area by using the
dial.
7 Align your subject in the frame and halfpress [Shutter] to focus.
8 Press [Shutter] to take a photo.
Focusing methods
AF Zoom Move
MENU OK
1 2 1 1 2 3
AF Mode
AF Area
AF Priority
MF Assist
Drive
Flash
3
Back Set
Selection AF
Multi AF
Face Detection AF
Self-Portrait AF
AF Zoom Move63
Setting the MF Assist
When the lens’ focus method is set to Manual Focus
(MF), this function helps focus the subject by expending
the screen automatically.
1 Set the focus method to Manual Focus.
2 Select Shooting 2 (
2) → MF Assist
3 Select a desired option.
Off Do not enlarge the subject on screen when it
is in Manual focus mode.
On Enlarge the subject on screen when you adjust
the focus in Manual focus mode.
MENU OK
1 2 1 1 2 3
AF Mode
AF Area
AF Priority
MF Assist
Drive
Flash
3
On
Off
On
Back Set
Focusing methods64
Face detection
When you use the Face Detection AF function, you can set the focus around a person's face when taking a portrait
shot. This function can also be useful when shooting a self-portrait.
Normal face detection
When you use the Face Detection AF option, the
camera sets the auto focus based on the faces in the
frame.
When the shooting composition is set, the camera
automatically detects as many as 10 faces and sets the
focus and exposure.
1 In the Shooting mode, press [MENU].
2
Select Shooting 2 (
2) → AF Area →
Face Detection AF.
• Face detection may not be effective when.
- The subject is too far away
- The light is too bright or dark
- The subject is not facing the camera
- When part of the face is hidden by an object
like sunglasses.
- Part of the subject's face is hidden by
sunglasses or similar objects
- The subject makes a large facial expression
- The light or backlight on the subject's face is
not uniform
• Depending on the Picture Wizard option, the
camera may not recognize the subject’s face
• The options available may differ depending on
the shooting mode.
• This function is not available if you have selected
such options as Manual Focus and Selection
AF.
• The face detection function works faster when
the camera is closer to the subject.
• When you use the Face Detection AF option,
the white focus area is automatically set to
focus.
The focus frame is
shown by white for
the closest face and
by gray for the rest of
faces. 65
Self-portrait face detection
With Self-Portrait AF on, the camera chirps rapidly
when your face is in focus.
1 In the Shooting mode, press [MENU].
2 Select Shooting 2 (
2) → AF Area →
Self-Portrait AF.
3 Press [Shutter] if having an info sound of
shooting.
Check the focus of the subject in Shooting mode
Face detection66
Brightness and color adjustment of picture
Adjusting the exposure (brightness)
The images can be taken bright or dark according to the
amount of light. In this case, appropriate adjustment can
be made by controlling the amount of light entered into
the lens.
S Applying - S 0 S Applying +
1 Check the accurate focus of subject in the
shooting mode
2 To adjust the exposure value, hold down
the [ ] button, and then rotate the dial.
• The adjustment value of exposure can be
checked from the viewfinder and display.
3
Press the [Shutter] button to take a
picture.
Exposure adjustment
You can set the size of the exposure adjustment.
1 In the Shooting mode, press [MENU].
2 Select User setup (
1) → EV Step →
an option.
1/3 Change the exposure level by 1/3 step.
1/2 Change the exposure level by 1/2 step.
• When fixing and using the exposure value being
set, it may be excessively bright or dark according
to the shooting environment. Please take a picture
by adjusting the exposure value appropriate for the
shooting environment.
• When it is difficult to judge an appropriate value
of exposure, please set the detailed setting
of AE BKT (successive shots of exposure
increase/decrease). This takes 3 pictures
successively, including one step darker one and
one step brighter one (p. 73).
• The camera displays the exposure warning in red for
each step beyond the ±3 range.
Standard
exposure
index
Exposure level
display
Decreased exposure
(Darker)
Increased exposure
(Brighter)
3
- +
2 2 1 1 0 3
Exposure warning
3 267
Changing the brightness
measurement method
If the composition of image is set, the camera measures
the amount of light. At this time, the brightness and
overall mood of the picture may vary depending on how
the measurement is made.
1 In the Shooting mode, press [MENU].
2 Select Shooting 3 (
3/
3 ) → Metering
→ an option.
Spot
• Calculate the amount of light in the
center.
• This is suitable when taking a portrait
shot where there is a strong backlight.
• When the subject is not located in the
center of the display, the subject can
appear to be too bright or too dark.
Centerweighted
• This calculates the amount of light
in the center portion of the shot and
averages the result over the entire
image.
• This is suitable when the area of the
subject is large when compared to the
overall composition of the picture.
Multi
• Calculate the amount of light in multiple
areas.
• Suitable for normal pictures.
Brightness and color adjustment of picture
The function can be set directly by pressing
[ ] in the shooting mode.68
Setting the white balance
Different light sources will affect the resulting color of
your picture. To take a picture with colors close to
what is seen with our own eyes, please select the white
balance appropriate for the light source or manually
adjust the color temperature desired.
In case of a light source that is difficult to take in to
effect, the shot can be taken by adjusting the white
balance manually according to the picture-taking
situation.
Auto Daylight
Cloudy Incandescent bulb
1 In the Shooting mode, press [MENU].
2 Select Shooting 1 (
1/
1) → White
Balance → an option.
Auto WB The camera automatically selects the
optimal white balance settings.
Daylight For shooting outdoors on a clear day.
Cloudy For shooting outdoors on a cloudy day.
Fluorescent
White
Daylight, fluorescent lamp, suitable
especially for the white fluorescent light
with the color temperature of about 4200K
Fluorescent
NW
Daylight, fluorescent lamp, suitable
especially for the daylight fluorescent
lighting with the color temperature of about
5,000K
Fluorescent
Daylight
Daylight, fluorescent lamp, suitable
especially for the daylight-like fluorescent
lighting with the color temperature of about
6,500K
Tungsten For shooting under halogen lamps and
standard, incandescent bulbs.
Flash WB Suitable when using the built-in flash light
Custom Set To create a custom white ballance setting.
Color Temp. To set the color temperature manually.
Brightness and color adjustment of picture
The function can be set directly by pressing [WB] in
the shooting mode.69
Fine adjustment of the white balance
1 In the Shooting mode, press [MENU].
2 Select Shooting 1 (
1/
1) → White
Balance.
3 Select a White Balance option, and then
press [Fn].
4 Adjust a desired white balance by using
the dial or [S/T/W/X].
5 Press [ ] to save.
User setup method
If the shot is taken after setting the composition of
white paper, filled in full frame, an appropriate white
balance value is set according to the measured light
source.
1 In the Shooting mode, press [MENU].
2 Select Shooting 1 (
1/
1) → White
Balance.
3 Select Custom Set, and then press [Fn].
4 After setting the composition to show only
the white paper, press [Shutter].
Brightness and color adjustment of picture
White paper
G: Green
A: Amber
M: Magenta
B: Blue
•
•
•
•
MENU
1
WB Adjust
Back Reset70
Adjusting the color temperature
You can change the white balance by adjusting the
color temperature.
1 In the Shooting mode, press [MENU].
2 Select Shooting 1 (
1/
1) → White
Balance.
3 Select the Color Temp. option, and then
press [Fn].
4 Set the color temperature by rotating the
dial or pressing [W/X].
5 Press [ ] to save.
What is color temperature?
Color temperature refers to the temperature that has
expressed the color change of light in the absolute
temperature (K). This can express cold sense with the
rising color temperature and warm sense with the falling
color temperature.
Clear sky
Fluorescent_H
Cloudy
Daylight
Fluorescent_L
Halogen lamp
Incandescent bulb
Candle light
Brightness and color adjustment of picture
MENU
1 K Adjust
Back Reset
5500 K71
Color space
You can set the color space the camera uses.
1 Press [MENU] in the shooting mode.
2 Select Shooting 1 (
1) → Color Space
→ an option.
RGB sRGB Set the color space to sRGB.
RGB Adobe RGB Set the color space to Adobe RGB.
What is color space?
The image In/Output devices such as digital
camera, monitor and printer hold different ranges of
reproducing each color.
The possible range of color reproduction is referred to
as color space. Several standards of color space are
fixed for each device. This camera support sRGB and
Adobe RGB. sRGB is diversely used in the devices
like computer. It is recommended to use sRGB for
regular images. sRGB standards for International
standard of color space established by the IEC
(International Electrotechnical Commission).
This is defined from color space for PC monitors and
is also used as the standard color space for Exif.
Adobe RGB is the color space recommended by
Adobe Systems, Inc. for commercial printing and
has wider range of color reproduction than sRGB.
Adobe RGB covers most of the color range so colors
only available when printed are not lost when editing
images from a computer. When image is opened by
non-compatible software, the colors look lighter.
Brightness and color adjustment of picture
• When you set the color space to Adobe RGB, the
camera saves picture files in the "_SAMXXXX.JPG"
format.
• You can set the Color Space function directly by
pressing [Fn] in the Shooting mode.72
Smart range
Smart Range automatically corrects for the loss of
bright detail that can occur due to shading differences
in the picture.
▲ Canceling smart range ▲ Use of smart range
1 In the Shooting mode, press [MENU].
2 Select Shooting 3 (
3) → Smart Range
→ an option.
• When you turn on Smart Range, you cannot
select the ISO 100 option.
• The Smart range function is not available in
some shooting modes, and it may automatically
operate while you use the and shooting
options.
• You can set the Smart Range function directly
by pressing [Fn] in the Shooting mode.
Brightness and color adjustment of picture73
Changing the shooting method
It can be difficult to take a picture of a fast moving object, a quick facial expression, or the rapid motion of a person.
In this case, please select the successive shooting option appropriate for the situation.
Successive shooting method and
timer setup
You can select the successive shooting option
appropriate for the situation.
1 In Shooting mode, press [MENU].
2 Select Shooting 2 (
2) → Drive →
an option.
Drive mode button
You can can set this option directly by pressing the [ ]
in the Shooting mode.
Single Take one photo shot whenever you press the shutter.
Continuous Take shots successively while pressing and holding
down the shutter, possible to take 3 shots per second
Burst Press the shutter button and the camera takes up
to 30 shots in a row.
Timer Press the shutter button and the camera takes a
picture within 2 to 30 seconds.
AE BKT
When you press the shutter, the camera takes 3
consecutive shots: the original, one a step darker,
and one a step lighter.
WB BKT
When the shutter is pressed the camera will take
3 consecutive shots, the original and 2 more with
different white balance settings.
P Wiz BKT
When the shutter is pressed, the camera will take
3 consecutive shots; all three will have different
picture wizard settings.
• The options may differ depending on the Shooting
mode.
• The WB BKT and P Wiz BKT functions correct the
image after you take the shot.
• If you set the photo quality to the RAW format, you can
not use the bracketing options (WB BKT, P Wiz BKT).
• When you select the Burst shooting option, you can not
select the image size, and the image quality is fixed at
1472x976. Also, when you are shooting using the Burst
option, the camera can take longer to save the images.
• With the Burst shooting option, the camera can not
save images in the RAW file format. Also, you can not
set the ISO to 100.
• Both the built-in and external flash do not fire when you
use the Burst shooting option.
• The shutter speed can be set to 1/30 Sec or faster when
the Burst shooting option is in use.
• This product supports Burst Shooting mode which takes
up to 30 shots per second. The images taken in Burst
Shooting can be saved with a little bit enlarged size.74
Detailed bracket setup
The details for the exposure, white balance and picture
wizard of bracket shot can be set.
1 Press [MENU] in the shooting mode.
2 Select Shooting 3 (
3) → BKT Set →
an option.
3 Select the detailed options.
AE BKT Set
When using the exposure BKT function,
this allows setting the image shot
sequence and exposure interval.
BKT Order: Set the shooting orders
BKT Area: Set the exposure steps
WB BKT Set
When using the WB BKT function, this
allows setting the adjusted interval of
white balance value.
Example) MG-/+3 adjusts the Magenta
value of 3 steps minus or plus.
P Wiz BKT Set
When using the picture wizard BKT
function, this allows setting the shot
order.
MENU OK
3 BKT Set
AE BKT Set
WB BKT Set
P Wiz BKT Set
AB -/+3
Changing the shooting method
Exit Change
OK
3 P Wiz BKT Set
Standard
Vivid
Portrait
Landscape
Forest
Retro
Select Set75
Special effect/photo retouching
Picture wizard
The Picture Wizard function lets you select various
looks and emotional moods for your pictures.
T Example
Standard Vivid Portrait
Landscape Forest Retro
Cool Calm Classic
1 In the Shooting mode, press [MENU].
2 Select Shooting 1 (
1) → Picture
Wizard → an option.
3 Adjust the detailed items of picture wizard
that were selected by using [S/T/W/X].
• You can control the color, saturation,
sharpness and contrast.
4 Set to a desired value.
• The option can be set directly by pressing the
[ ] button of camera in the shooting mode.
MENU
Vivid
P L F R Cool CA
Color
■
0
0
0
V
Saturation
Sharpness
Contrast
Exit Move76
Special effect/photo retouching
Custom picture wizard setup
You can choose the customize options and then save
images in 3 different ways.
1 In the Shooting mode, press [MENU].
2 Select Shooting 1 (
1) → Picture
Wizard → Custom → an option.
3 Adjust the Picture Wizard value by using
[S/T/W/X]
• You can control the color, saturation,
sharpness, and contrast.
4 Set to a desired value.
MENU
Custom1
P L F R Cool CA C1
Color
■
0
0
0
Saturation
Sharpness
Contrast
Exit Move
Classic77
Key Mapping
Setting Key Mapping
The function of camera button can be changed.
1 In the Shooting mode, press [MENU].
2 Select User setup ( 1) → Key Mapping
→ an option.
AEL
You can choose among three
settings for the [AEL] button:
- AEL, which executes the auto
exposure lock function.
- AFL, which executes the auto
focus lock function.
- AEL + AFL, which executes the
auto exposure and focus lock
functions together.
Preview
You can chose between two settings
for the Depth Preview button:
- One-Touch WB which executes
the Custom White Balance
function.
- Optical Preview which executes
the Depth of Field Preview
function for the current aperture
value.
What is AEL function?
The auto exposure lock (AEL) and auto focus lock (AFL)
functions of the camera are the functions that maintain the
settings until the shooting is completed by remembering the
exposure value and focus when pushing the [AEL] button of
camera.
Reaction of the half-shutter release when the AEL button
is set to the following status.
Status of AEL setting Reaction of the half-shutter
release
AEL Auto focus
AFL Exposure lock
AEL+AFL None
• While shooting a movie, push the [Depth
Preview] button once to activate the AF
function and once again to cancel the function.
• Refer to the “Depth Preview” function. (p. 37)
• The function of AEL button cannot be changed
in the M(manual) mode.Playback/Editing
Learn how to play back and edit photos/videos. Also, learn how to
connect your camera to your computer, photo printer, TV, or HDTV.
Play (picture/movie) …………………………………… 79
Picture editing ………………………………………… 87
Viewing files on a TV or HDTV ………………………… 91
Transferring files to your computer ………………… 93
Using the Samsung RAW Converter ………………… 99
Printing photos with a photo printer (PictBridge) ……… 10279
Viewing pictures in the play mode
You can view saved pictures and movies.
1 Press [ ]
• Shows most recently saved file.
2 View the pictures sequentially using
[W/X].
• When the playback screen is selected
more than once, the last shown picture
or movie is selected to be shown during
playback.
Photo playback information screens
The display information appears by pressing [DISP] in
the play mode.
1 RAW file indicator
2 File that includes development info
3 Protected file indicator
4 File no.
5 Meta value of picture
6 Shutter speed info
7 Aperture value
8 ISO setup value info
9
File playing/total no. of files stored/battery
information
Play (picture/movie)
1/250 F5.1 ISO 100 00004/00009
100-0001
Mode
Flash
Focal Length
White balance
EVC
Picture size
Date
8 9
4
5
6 7
3
2
18mm
0.0
4592 X 3056
2010.01.01
RAW
180
1 Shot image
2 RGB histogram
3
Shooting mode, metering, flash, white balance,
picture wizard, focal length
4
Shutter speed, aperture value, ISO, selected
file/total number of files/ battery information
Movie playback information screen
1 Volume control display
2 Protected file
3 File no.
4 Meta value of movie
5 Fast forward
6 Total play time of selected file
7 Current play time
8 Rewind
Play (picture/movie)
OK
WWaWW WXaWW
100-0001
1280 X 720
2010.01.01
Video size
Date
3
4
1
7 6
8 5
2
1/40 F3.5 ISO 100 00004/00009
0.0 4592 X 3056 2010.01.01
R
G
B
1
2
3
4
Y
RAW 18mm
Play Capture81
View files in the smart album by category
The files can be classified and shown by the file, date
(day), date (week), and type.
1 In Playback mode, press [ ].
2
Press [MENU].
3 Select a desired playback method.
Type Classify by the saved file form
Date Classify by date recorded.
Week Classify by week recorded.
4
You can view items by turning the dial or
pressing [W/X].
5
Press [ ] to return to the previous function.
Converting to the thumbnail view
Since several files can be shown on one display, files
can be searched quickly.
To have a thumbnail view
of 9 images, press [ ] two
times, or press [ ] three
times to have a thumbnail
view of 20 images.
(Press [ ] to cancel)
Play (picture/movie)
When you start Smart Album or change the filter method,
the time it takes for the camera to classify and display
files depends on the number of files saved. Please wait a
until Smart Album appears.
MENU 2010. 1. 1
19 25 19 53 22
Filter
MENU 2010. 1. 1
19 25 19 53 22
Type
Date
Week
Filter 82
File protection
You can protect files from accidental deletion.
1
Press [AEL] in the play mode.
2 appears on the display.
3 Press [AEL] to cancel.
Deleting a file
Files can be selected and deleted in the play mode.
The function can be set by pressing [MENU] in the
playback mode.
Deleting one picture
You can delete only one picture by selecting a desired
file.
1 After selecting the file to be deleted in the
play mode, press [ ].
2 From the popup window, select Yes.
Deleting selected file
1
After selecting the file to be deleted in the
play mode, press [ ].
2 From the popup window, select Multiple
Delete.
3 After selecting a file to be deleted, press
[ ].
• To cancel your selection, press [ ] again.
4 Press [ ]
5 From the popup window, select Yes.
Play (picture/movie)83
Deleting all files
All the files saved in the memory card can be deleted
at once.
1 In Playback mode, press [MENU].
2
Select Playback [ ] → Delete → All.
3 From the popup window, select Yes.
Auto rotate
Show the pictures taken in the vertical frame by rotating
them automatically while in playing.
1 In Playback mode, press [MENU].
2
Select Playback [ ] → Auto Rotate →
On.
High Light
This informs the excessively bright part from the image
taken.
1 In Playback mode, press [MENU].
2
Select Playback [ ] → High Light →
On.
Play (picture/movie)
If the photo shot is taken when the direction of the
camera was aimed at the bottom, the direction of the
image can be different in the playback mode.84
Enlargement/reduction
A picture can be enlarged when searching in play
mode.
Enlargement
Press [ ] to enlarge.
(Press [ ] to reduce)
Move enlargement
on screen Press [S/T/W/X].
Trim the enlarged
image
Press the [Fn] button to select a
portion of the image to be cut.
See the slide show
Pictures can be shown in a slide show by applying
various effects and music.
1 In Playback mode, press [MENU] → [ ].
2 Select a desired option
• To play without selecting an option, go to
step 4.
Images
Select the pictures you want in the slide show.
• All : Include all the saved pictures in the
slide show.
• Date : Include pictures taken on a specific
date in the slide show.
• Select : Select pictures and see them in the
slide show
Effect
• Select the transition effects between
pictures.
• In order not to use the changing effect,
select the off option.
Interval • Select the scene changing time
Music Execute the background music
Play (picture/movie)
OK Fn
x1.7
Magnified part
Magnification
(The maximum
magnification may
differ by resolution)
Full Image Trim85
3 Set to a desired option.
4 Select Slide Show → Play.
• To play the slide show repeatedly, please
select the repeat option.
5 Watch the slide show
• To stop slide show, press [ ] and then
press [W/X].
Pause/Play Press the [ ] button.
View a movie
While a movie is being played back, you are able to
select and cut a desired part of the scene.
1 After selecting a desired movie in the play
mode, press [ ].
2 Enjoy movie.
Rewind Press [W]
Pause/Play Press [ ].
Fast rewind Press [X]
Volume control Turn the dial to the left/right
Stop Press [S]
Play (picture/movie)
OK
WWaW[
PLAY
WXaWW
100-0001
Pause Stop86
Capturing a picture
You can capture a frame of the movie as a picture while
playing back the movie.
1 Press [ ] in the play mode.
2
Press [ ] while playing a movie.
3 Press [T] in the pause state.
Cutting part of a movie
1 Press [ ] in the play mode.
2 Select the start point to cut by pressing
[ ] → [ ] while playing a movie.
3 Select the end point of cutting by pressing
[ ] → [ ].
4 From the popup window, press Yes.
Play (picture/movie)
• The resolution of the captured image is the
same as the movie resolution.
• The captured file is saved as a separate file
under a new file name.
• The cut file is saved by using a different file
name.87
Picture editing
Pictures can be edited in various ways by using the edit menu. The function can be set directly by pressing [Fn] in the
shooting mode.
Changing the resolution
1 After selecting a desired picture in the play
mode, press [MENU].
2 Select Image Edit → Resize.
3 Select desired image resolution.
• The edited file is saved by using the
different file name.
Rotating
1 After selecting a desired picture in the play
mode, press [MENU].
2 Select Image Edit → Rotate.
3 Select a desired rotation state
• The resolution to be changed will be limited
according to the resolution of original picture.
Depending on the size of the picture, when you
rotate the original, the new file may be smaller
compared to the original.
Resize Rotate88
Red-eye fix
1 After selecting a desired picture in the play
mode, press [MENU].
2 Select Playback [ ] → Image Edit →
Red-eye Fix.
Adjusting the backlight
1 After selecting a desired picture in the play
mode, press [MENU].
2 Select Playback [ ] → Image Edit →
Backlight.
Picture style
Selecting picture style allows you to express various
moods of emotion in your picture.
1 After selecting a desired picture in the play
mode, press [MENU].
2 Select Playback [ ] → Image Edit →
Photo Style Selector.
3 Set to a desired option.
Face retouching
1 After selecting a desired picture in the play
mode, press [MENU].
2 Select Playback [ ] → Image Edit →
Face Retouch.
3 Set to a desired option.
• The level of face retouch gets better as the
value becomes larger.
Picture editing89
Setting the print info (DPOF)
The size and number of copies to be printed can be
designated for the picture.
Since the designated information is saved in the MISC
folder of memory card, it is convenient to print the
designated size and number of copies while using the
pictures of designated info simply by taking the memory
card to a digital printing shop.
1 Press [MENU] → Playback [ ] → DPOF
→ Standard in the playback mode.
2 Select a desired option
Select Printing selected pictures
All Printing all
Reset Initializing the standard print option
3 When having made the selections, press
[Fn] after selecting the picture and
number of copies to be printed by using
the dial.
• When having selected all, press [S/T] to
select the number of copies to be printed
and then, press [ ].
• The print info you enter can only be used for the
digital printer or digital picture printing shop that
supports the digital print order format (DPOF).
• For pictures with a wide resolution, the left and
right portion of the image may not be printed.
When placing a print order, identify the wide
resolution pictures.
• The DPOF option is not available for RAW
formatted images and the movie files.
Picture editing90
4 Select [MENU] → DPOF → SIZE in the
playback mode.
5 Select an option
Select Select desired print size according to the
picture.
All Select the print size of all the pictures
saved in the memory card.
Reset Initializing the print size option
6 When having selected the select option,
select the picture to be printed and press
[Fn] after selecting the print size by using
the dial.
• When having selected all, press [S/T]
and select the print size. Then, select the
print size and press [ ].
Index printing
1 Press [MENU] → Playback [ ] → DPOF
→ Index in the playback mode.
2 From the popup window, press Yes.
Picture editing
The designated print size can only be applied onto
the DPOF1.1 compatible printer. 91
Viewing files on a TV or HDTV
Play back photos or videos by connecting your camera to a TV using the provided A/V cable.
Viewing files on a regular TV
1 Select a video signal output according to
your country or region. (p. 108)
2 Connect the TV and the camera using the
A/V cable.
3 Make sure the TV and camera are turned
on and select the video output mode of
TV.
4 View the videos and pictures using the
buttons of camera body.
On some TVs, digital noise may occur or part of an
image may not appear.
Images may not appear centered on the TV screen
depending on your TV settings.
You cannot capture photos or videos while the
camera is connected to a TV.
•
•
•
Video Audio92
Viewing files on an HDTV
1 Select a video signal output according to
your country or region. (p. 108)
2 In Shooting or Playback mode, select
[MENU] → Setting 3 ( 3
) → HDMI Size
→ an option.
3 Connect the HDTV and the camera using
the HDMI cable.
4 Make sure the HDTV and camera are turned
on and select the HDMI mode of TV.
• The HDTV screen shows the same display
of the camera.
5 View the videos and pictures using the
buttons of camera body.
When using the HDMi cable, the user can
connect the camera to an HDTV using the
Anynet+(CEC) method. The Anynet+(CEC)
functions allows you to control connected
devices using the TV remote control.
In the case that the HDTV supports
Anynet+(CEC), the power of the TV is
automatically turned on when used in conjunction
with the caemra.
When connected to an HDTV by an HDMI cable,
the camera can not take a pictures or movies.
When connected to an HDTV, some playback
functions may not be available.
•
•
•
•
Viewing files on a TV or HDTV
HDMI cable
If both A/V and HDMI cables are connected at the
same time, the HDMI cable has the highest priority.
We recommend you disconnect the A/V cable for
better playback.93
Transferring files to your computer
For Windows users
Transfer files by connecting your camera to your PC.
Installing programs
Hardware and software requirements
Item Requirements
CPU Intel Pentium 4 3.2GHz or higher
RAM 1GB or more (2 GB or more recommended)
OS Windows XP SP2/Vista/7
Hard disk
capacity
250 MB or more (1 GB or more
recommended)
Others
USB port
CD-ROM drive
1024 x 768 pixels, 16-bit color display
compatible monitor (32-bit color
display recommended)
Microsoft Direct X 9.0c or later
•
•
•
•
Programs contained on the CD
Program Purpose
Intelli-studio Edit photos and videos.
Samsung RAW
Converter
Convert RAW files into the
desired file format.
Using a self-assembled PC or a PC and OS that are
not supported may void your warranty.
The programs may not work properly on 64-bit
Edition of Windows XP, Vista and 7.
•
•
Intelli-studio may not perform correctly on some
computers, even when the computer meets the
requirements.
If your computer does not meet the requirements,
videos may not play correctly or it may take longer
to edit videos.
Install DirectX 9.0c or above before you use the
program.
You must use Windows XP/Vista/7 or Mac OS 10.4
or later to connect the camera as a removable disk.
•
•
•
•94
Transferring files to your computer
1 Insert the installation CD in a compatible CDROM drive.
2
When the setup screen is displayed, click
Samsung Digital Camera Installer to start
installation.
3
Select programs to install, and follow the
onscreen instructions.
4
Click Exit to complete the installation, and then
restart your computer.
Transferring files to your PC
When you connect the camera to your PC, the PC
recognizes the camera as a removable drive.
1
Connect your camera to your PC with the USB
cable.
You must plug the end of the cable with the correct
connection plug into your camera. If the cable is reversed, it
may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible
for any loss of data.95
2 Turn on the camera.
• In the popup window, select Computer.
3
On your PC, select My Computer→
Removable Disk→DCIM→ "XXXPHOTO," or
select "XXX_MMDD" folder.
4
Select the files you want, and then drag or save
them to your PC.
Disconnecting the camera (for Windows XP)
The way to disconnect the USB cable for Windows
2000 and Vista is similar.
1 It the status lamp on your camera is blinking, it
means the data transfer is in progress. Please
wait until the status lamp stops blinking.
2
Click on the tool bar at the bottom right of
your PC screen.
3
Click the pop-up message.
4
Remove the USB cable.
Transferring files to your computer
If the Folder Type is set to Date, the folder name
appears as "XXX_MMDD."
For example, if shot at January 1st, the folder name
appears as "101_0101."
•
•96
For Mac users
When you connect the camera to a Macintosh
computer, the computer recognizes the camera
automatically. You can transfer files directly from
the camera to the computer without installing any
programs.
1
Connect your camera to a Macintosh computer
with the USB cable.
2 Turn on the camera.
In the popup window, select Computer.
3
Double-click the removable disk icon.
4 Transfer photos or videos to the computer.
•
When using the USB cable, make sure to match the plugs
on the cable to the USB jacks on the camera and computer.
If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The
manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data.
Please use only the accessories that SAMSUNG
provides. The manufacturer takes no responsibility for
any loss of files or damage that may result from the
use of other manufacturer’s product.
•
•
Mac OS 10.4 or later is supported.
Transferring files to your computer97
Using Intelli-studio
Once you have installed the Intelli-studio on your PC, the Intelli-studio starts automatically when a camera is
connected with your PC. If the Intelli-studio does not start after you have connected the camera to your PC,
double-click the Intelli-studio icon on your Windows desktop.
The Intelli-studio allows you to play back and edit files. You can also upload files to websites, such as Flickr or
YouTube. For details, select [Menu → Help] in the program.
Transferring files to your computer
You cannot edit files directly on the camera. Transfer files to a folder on your computer before editing.
You cannot copy files in your computer to the camera.
Intelli-studio supports the following formats:
- Videos: AVI(MJPEG), MP4 (Video: H.264, Audio: AAC), WMV (WMV 7/8/9)
- Photos: JPG, GIF, BMP, PNG, TIFF
•
•
•98
Icon Description
1 Open menus
2 Display files in the selected folder
3 Change to the Photo edit mode
4 Change to the Video edit mode
5
Change to the Sharing mode (You can
send files by email or upload files to
websites, such as Flickr or YouTube.)
6
Enlarge or reduce the thumbnails in the
list
7 Select a file type
8
View files of the selected folder on your
computer
9
Show or hide files of the connected
camera
10 View files of the selected folder on the
camera
11 View files as thumbnails, in Smart Album,
or on a map
12 Browse folders in the connected device
13 Browse folders in your computer
14 Move to the previous or next folder
15 Print files, view files on a map, store files
in My Folder, or register faces
Transferring files using Intelli-studio
Intelli-studio will start automatically when you connect
the camera to your computer with the USB cable.
1 Connect the camera to your computer
with the USB cable.
2 Turn on the camera.
The computer recognizes the camera
automatically.
3
Select a folder on your computer to save new
files.
If your camera has no new files, the pop-up
window for saving new files will not appear.
4
Select Yes.
New files will be transferred to the computer.
•
•
•
Transferring files to your computer
If the camera fails to connect, a pop-up window will appear.
Select Computer.
For Windows Vista, select Run Installer.exe from the
AutoPlay window.99
Using the Samsung RAW Converter
Using the Samsung RAW Converter, you can
develop RAW files after editing them as you like. You
can also edit JPEG or TIFF files in the same way you
edit the RAW files. This software is only compatible
with Windows XP, Vista and 7.
To start the program, click [Start → All Programs
→ Samsung RAW Converter → Samsung RAW
Converter]
Editing the RAW files
Image edit functions are listed below.
Ì Menu bar
Í Image editing tools
[Exposure bias]: Compensates the exposure
value.
[White balance]: Adjusts the white balance value.
[Color]: Adjusts the color of the image.
[Tone]: Changes the color tone.
[Sharpness/
Noise reduction]: Adjusts the sharpness.
[Development]: Previewing is available for the
final output.
Highlight controller
Adjusts the saturation and highlights of the
selected image.
Histogram
Displays the color layers of the selected image.
Preview window
Displays the selected image.
•
Refer to the [Help] menu in the Samsung RAW
Converter for further information.
You can download the Samsung RAW Converter
program for Macintosh from the Samsung website.
•
•
②
①
⑤
③
④100
Using the Samsung RAW Converter
Correcting the exposure
The main feature of the Samsung RAW Converter is
that you can keep the best quality of the images as
you make changes to the RAW files while editing.
After making changes to the brightness or contrast,
you can still obtain the same result no matter which
you change first. The following images show how
you can change the exposure on an image using the
Samsung RAW Converter.
You can adjust the exposure by using the menu
option as shown in the picture below.
You can see the results of the exposure adjustment
in the histograms below:
▲ Original image
P Mode, Aperture:
f = 8,
Shutter Speed:
1/15sec, ISO = 100
▲ Changed image
after correcting the
exposure.
▲ Original image ▲ Changed image
after correcting the
exposure.
Menu option for
adjusting the
exposure.101
Using the Samsung RAW Converter
Handling the JPEG/TIFF files as you
edit RAW files
Using the Samsung RAW Converter, you can edit
JPEG/TIFF files in the same way you edit RAW files.
You can adjust the white balance, sharpness, and
reducing the noise is also available. The following
images show how to change the contrast on a TIFF
image using the Samsung RAW Converter.
You can adjust the contrast by using the menu
option as shown in the picture.
Saving the RAW files in JPEG or TIFF
format
You can save the RAW files in JPEG or TIFF format
using the Samsung RAW Converter.
1. Choose the image you want to edit, and then
select [File(F)] → [Development...].
2. Select the type of file as JPEG or TIFF and then
click [Save(S)].
- The selected file is saved as JPEG or TIFF
format.
▲ Original image P Mode,
Aperture: f = 8, Shutter
Speed: 1/15sec, ISO = 100
▲ Changed image after
correcting the contrast.
Menu option for adjusting the contrast102
Printing photos with a photo printer (PictBridge)
Print photos with a PictBridge-compatible printer by connecting your camera directly to the printer.
1
With the printer on, connect your camera to the
printer with a USB cable.
2 Turn on your camera.
Select Printer in the popup window.
3
Press [W/X] to select a photo.
Press [MENU] to set printing options.
4
Press [ ] to print.
•
•
Configuring print settings
Print MENU Exit
1 2
Images
Size
Layout
Type
Quality
Date
One Photo
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
Images Select whether to print the current photo
or all photos.
Size Specify the size of the print.
Layout Create thumbnail prints.
Type Select the type of paper.
Quality Set the printing quality.
Date Set to print the date.
File Name Set to print the name of the file.
Reset Reset the print options.
If your printer has the mass storage feature, you
must first set the USB mode to Printer in the settings
menu.
•
Some options are not supported by some printers.Camera settings menu
You can set the camera use environment using the setup menu.
Camera settings menu ……………………………… 104104
1 Press [MENU] in the shooting or play
mode.
2 Select a desired setup menu
3 Select a desired item
4 Press [MENU] to return to the previous
mode.
Camera settings menu
You can set the camera use environment using the setup menu.
MENU OK
1 2 1 1 2 3
Quickview
Display Adjust
Display Save
Power Save
Date&Time
Sound
1sec
3min
1min
3
Setup menu
items
MENU OK
2
Sound
System Volume
AF Sound
Button Sound
Medium
On
On
Exit Change
Exit Change105
Sound
System Volume You can set the camera use environment using the setup menu.
(Off, Low, Medium*, High)
AF Sound Sets the sound the camera makes in AF mode on or off. (Off, On*)
Button Sound Sets the sound the camera makes when you press buttons on or off. (Off, On*)
Display
Language Select the language the camera shows on the display.
Display Adjust
Adjust the display brightness, auto brightness setting, or display color.
Display Brightness: You can adjust the display brightness using the [S/T] to one of five
brightness levels.
Auto Brightness: Adjust the brightness of screen.
Display Color: Depending on whether the user uses the screen or the viewfinder, the display
color can be adjusted by using the [S/T/W/X].
Display Save Sets the display off time. (Off, 0.5min*, 1min, 3min, 5min, 10min)
Quickview This allows setting the quick view (view immediately upon a shot) time.
(Off, 1sec*, 3sec, 5sec, Hold)
Camera settings menu
* Default value
* Default value106
Normal setup 1( 1 )
Format
This formats the memory card (deleting all the files including protected files).
(Yes, No*)
Error can occur if using a card formatted by another brand of camera, memory card reader or computer.
Please use the card after formatting it from the camera.
Reset This resets the setup menu and shooting options. (The date, time, language, and video output value
are kept.) (Yes, No*)
File Name
This sets the method of designating filename.
Standard* : SAM_XXXX.JPG(sRGB)/_SAMXXXX.JPG(Adobe RGB)
Date : MMDDXXXX.JPG(sRGB)/_MDDXXXX.JPG(Adobe RGB, Jan. ~ Sep.)/
_ADDXXXX.JPG(Adobe RGB, indicating A for Oct, B for Nov, C for Dec)
For example, the image taken by setting Jan 01 sRGB is saved in "0101xxxx.jpg".
File
Number
This sets the method of designating file number. (Series*, Reset)
• The folder name that has taken pictures for the first time becomes 100PHOTO and the filename
will be SAM_0001 (when the color space is sRGB).
• The filename number is increased by 1 in the range of SAM_0001~ SAM_9999.
• File name numbers are increased by 1 from SAM_0001 to SAM_9999.
• Folder numbers are increased by 1 from 100PHOTO to 999PHOTO.
• The maximum number of files that can be saved in one folder is 9999.
• File names are assigned according to DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) specifications.
• If you change a file name (for example, on a computer), the camera will not be able to play the file.
Folder
Type
This sets the type of folder.
Standard* : XXXPHOTO
Date : XXX_MMDD
* Default value
Camera settings menu107
Power
Save
This sets the power turned off automatically if not being used for a while. (0.5 min, 1min*, 3min,
5min, 10min, 30min)
• The camera retains the power-off time setting even if you replace the battery.
• Power Save may not work if the camera is connected to a computer, TV, or printer, playing a slide show or
movie.
Date &
Time
This sets the date and time.
(Type, Date, Time Zone, Time, Imprint)
• Only the date is shown on the lower right side of the picture in play.
• When printing a picture, the date may not be printed appropriately from certain manufacturer or printer model.
Camera settings menu
* Default value
Normal setup 2( 2 ) 108
Display
Select
Auto Select* : Convert between Main Display and EVF by eye sensor
Main Display : The screen will be shown only through Main Display
EVF : The screen will be shown only through EVF
Video Out
Select the video output signal appropriate for your country when connecting the camera to an
external video device such as a monitor or TV.
NTSC* : US, Canada, Japan, Korea, Taiwan, Mexico, etc.
PAL (supporting only the BDGHI method) : Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Holland, Finland,
Germany, England, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New Zealand, Singapore, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland,
Thailand, Norway, etc.
Anynet+
(HDMICEC)
When you connect the camera to an HDTV that supports Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), you can control the
play function of the camera with the TV remote controller (p. 91).
On* : You can control the play function of camera with the TV remote controller.
Off : You can NOT control the play function of camera with the TV remote controller.
HDMI Size
The resolution on an HDTV can be changed when using an HDMI cable.
(In case of NTSC method : Auto*, 1080i, 720p, 480p)
(In case of PAL method : Auto*, 1080i, 720p, 576p)
If the connected HDTV does not support the selected resolution, you select, the camera sets the resolution
one level lower.
Firmware
Update
Displays the firmware version of the camera body and lens, and upgrades the firmware.
Body Firmware: Upgrades the firmware of the camera body.
Lens Firmware: Upgrades the firmware of the lens.
• You can upgrade the firmware by downloading it from www.samsung.com.
• You can not run a firmware upgrade without a fully charged the battery. Recharge the battery fully before
running a firmware upgrade or attach the adaptor to provide power (optional).
• After upgrading the firmware, the user customized options are reset to the default value.
(The date, time, language, and video output values are kept.)
Camera settings menu
* Default value
Normal setup 3( 3 )
Display
Select
Auto Select* : Convert between Main Display and EVF by eye sensor
Main Display : The screen will be shown only through Main Display
EVF : The screen will be shown only through EVF
Video Out
Select the video output signal appropriate for your country when connecting the camera to an
external video device such as a monitor or TV.
NTSC* : US, Canada, Japan, Korea, Taiwan, Mexico, etc.
PAL (supporting only the BDGHI method) : Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Holland, Finland,
Germany, England, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New Zealand, Singapore, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland,
Thailand, Norway, etc.
Anynet+
(HDMICEC)
When you connect the camera to an HDTV that supports Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), you can control the
play function of the camera with the TV remote controller (p. 91).
On* : You can control the play function of camera with the TV remote controller.
Off : You can NOT control the play function of camera with the TV remote controller.
HDMI Size
The resolution on an HDTV can be changed when using an HDMI cable.
(In case of NTSC method : Auto*, 1080i, 720p, 480p)
(In case of PAL method : Auto*, 1080i, 720p, 576p)
If the connected HDTV does not support the selected resolution, you select, the camera sets the resolution
one level lower.
Firmware
Update
Displays the firmware version of the camera body and lens, and upgrades the firmware.
Body Firmware: Upgrades the firmware of the camera body.
Lens Firmware: Upgrades the firmware of the lens.
• You can download firmware upgrades from www.samsungimaging.co.kr or www.samsung.com.
• You can not run a firmware upgrade without a fully charged the battery. Recharge the battery fully before
running a firmware upgrade or attach the adaptor to provide power (optional).
• After upgrading the firmware, the user customized options are reset to the default value.
(The date, time, language, and video output values are kept.)Appendixes
Refer to error messages, specifications, and maintenance tips.
Error messages ……………………………………… 110
Camera maintenance ………………………………… 111
Before contacting a service center …………………… 115
Camera specifications ………………………………… 118
Lens specifications …………………………………… 122
Accessories (optional items) ………………………… 123
Index …………………………………………………… 125110
Error message Suggested remedies
Card Error Turn off your camera, and then turn it on again.
Remove your memory card, and then insert it
again.
Format your memory card. (p. 106)
•
•
•
Card Locked Unlock the memory card.
DCF Full Error File names do not match the DCF standard.
Transfer the files on the memory card to your
computer and format the card. (p. 106)
File Error Delete the damaged file or contact a service
center.
Low Battery Insert a charged battery or recharge the battery.
Memory Full Delete unnecessary files or insert a new memory
card.
No Image File Take photos or insert a memory card that has
some photos.
Check the lens. Check whether dust or foreign substances
between Lens contacts and Lens mount index.
Remove either dust or foreign substances if dirt or
foreign substances are appeared. Please be care
for avoid getting dirt foreign substances inside the
camera.
Error 00 Turn off the camera, remove the lens, and then
mount the lens again.
Error 01/02 Turn off the camera, remove the battery, and then
insert it again.
Error messages
When the following error messages appear, try these remedies.111
Cleaning your camera
Camera lens and display
Use a blower brush to remove dust and wipe the lens
gently with a soft cloth. If any dust remains, apply
lens cleaning liquid to a piece of lens cleaning paper
and wipe gently.
About dust in the image sensor
Depending on the different shooting conditions,
dust may appear in the photo images because
the image sensor can be exposed to the external
environment. This is not a problem of the product,
and the exposure to dust can occur in everyday
use of camera. When using the dust blower, do not
insert the blower through the lens mount, the camera
may malfunction. In that case, please contact to the
service center.
Camera body
Wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth.
Camera maintenance
Never use benzene, thinners, or alcohol to clean the
device. These solutions can damage the camera or
cause it to malfunction.
•112
About memory cards
Memory cards you can use
You can use SD (Secure Digital) and SDHC (Secure
Digital High Capacity) memory cards.
Terminal
Label (front)
Write-protect switch
You can prevent files from being deleted by using the
write-protect switch on the SD or SDHC card. Slide
the switch down to lock or slide it up to unlock. Lock
the card to prevent deletions. Unlock the card when
shooting.
Memory card capacity
The memory capacity may vary depending on the
scenes you shoot or the shooting conditions. These
capacities are based on a 1GB SD card:
Size Super
Fine Fine Normal RAW RAW+SF RAW+F RAW+N
Photos
14M
(3:2) 142 278 408 35 28 31 32
10M
(3:2) 197 382 724 - 32 34 36
6M
(3:2) 322 615 1128 - 36 38 39
2M
(3:2) 738 1334 2238 - 41 42 43
12M
(16:9) 168 328 630 - 30 33 35
8M
(16:9) 234 454 860 - 34 36 37
5M
(16:9) 381 727 1334 - 38 39 40
2M
(16:9) 872 1573 2638 - 42 43 43
Burst 1201 2092 3320 - - - -
Size HQ Normal
*Movies
(30fps)
1280
(16:9) Approx. 15mins Approx. 22mins
640
(4:3) Approx. 44mins Approx. 66mins
320
(4:3) Approx. 145mins Approx. 210mins
* The time available for recording may differ if you use the
zoom. Several movies were recorded in succession to
determine the total recording time.
Camera maintenance113
About the battery
Use only Samsung-approved batteries.
Battery specifications
Mode BP1310
Type Lithium-ion battery
Cell capacity 1300 mAh
Voltage 7.4 V
Charging time
(When fully discharged) Approx. 150 min
Battery life
Shooting mode Number of photos
Photos Approx. 200 min/Approx. 400
photos
Videos Approx. 130 min
The figures above are measured by Samsung’s standards and
may differ depending on actual usage.
The shooting time may change depending on the shooting
environment and shot intervals.
Several videos were recorded in succession to determine the
total recording time.
•
•
•
Camera maintenance114
Notes about charging the battery
If the charging indicator light does not light, make sure that
the battery is inserted correctly.
If the indicator light blinks in red or does not illuminate,
reconnect the adaptor cable, or remove the battery and
insert it again.
If you charge the battery when it is warm, the indicator
light may turn orange. Charging will start when the battery
cools down.
When using the battery, please keep the following guidelines.
Failure to follow these guidleline may cause excessive
heat, fire, or explosion.
If the battery is bulging or distorted, contact a Samsung
service center. It may present a physical danger.
It may present physical dangers.
Use only the recommended battery charger.
Do not place the product close to any high temperature
source.
Do not insert the product into a microwave.
Do not place the product inside a car during the summer.
Do not place the product in a hot, humid environment.
Do not place the camera on a carpet, comforter, or
electronic mattress for a long time.
Do not leave the product turned on where there is little or
no air circulation.
Do not let accessories like necklaces, coins, keys,
watches, etc., come in contact with the battery chamber.
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Use Advanced Lithium Batteries with a guarantee from
the manufacturing company
Do not disassemble the battery or perforate the battery
with a pin.
Do not subject the battery or camera to high pressure.
Do not drop or strike the camera or battery, or subject
either to rough handling or sudden shocks.
Do not expose the battery or camera to temperatures
over 60ºC (140ºF) degree.
Do not expose the product to water or humidity.
Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire or the like.
Guidelines of disposal
Follow the disposal instructions and properly dispose
of the used battery.
Do not dispose of the battery by throwing it in a fire.
Disposal instructions may differ depending on your
country or specifi c region.
Follow the disposal instructions of your country,
state, etc.
Guideline of recharging the battery.
Do not recharge the battery using a method that
differs from the method detailed in this users manual.
Failure to follow these instruction may cause a fire or
explosion.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Camera maintenance115
Before contacting a service center
If you are having trouble with your camera, try these troubleshooting procedures before contacting a service
center. If you have attempted the troubleshooting solution and are still having problems with your device, contact
your local dealer or authorized Samsung service center.
Situation Suggested remedies
Cannot turn on the camera
Make sure that the battery is inserted.
Make sure that the battery is inserted correctly.
Charge the battery.
•
•
•
The power turns off suddenly
Charge the battery.
Your camera may be in Power save mode. (p. 107)
The power automatically turns off to preven the camera from malfunctoning in the case
that the unit overheats.
•
•
•
The camera is losing battery
power quickly
The battery may lose power more quickly in low temperatures (below 0° C). Keep the
battery warm by putting it into your pocket.
Using the flash or recording videos depletes the battery quickly. Recharge if needed.
The ability of a Lithium battery to hold a charge dimishes over time. If your battery
looses its charge rapidly on a regular basis, purchase a new battery.
•
•
•
Cannot take photos
There is no space on the memory card. Delete unnecessary files or insert a new card.
Format the memory card. (p. 106)
The memory card is defective. Get a new memory card.
The memory card is locked. Unlock the card. (p. 112)
Make sure that the camera is switched on.
Charge the battery.
Make sure that the batte ry is inserted correctly.
When you use the AF Priority function, you cannot take a picture without adjusting
the focus on the subject correctly. Disable the AF Priority function, or set the focus
accurately.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The camera freezes Remove the battery, and then insert it again.
The flash does not work The flash option may be set to Off. (p. 55)
You cannot use the flash in the mode, or some modes.
•
•
The flash fires unexpectedly The flash may fire due to static electricity.
This is not a malfunction of the camera.116
Before contacting a service center
Situation Suggested remedies
The date and time are
incorrect
Set the date and time in the Setting2 ( 2
) menu.
The display or buttons do
not work
Remove the battery, and then insert it again.
The memory card has an error The memory card has not been reset. Format the card. (p. 106)
Cannot play back files
If you change the name of a file, your camera may not be able to play the file (the name of
the file should meet the DCF standard). If you encounter this situation, play back files on
your computer.
The photo is blurry
If the subject is out of focus, the photo may be blurry. Make a change to the shooting
condition.
If the camera is shaken while shooting, the photo may be blurry. Use a tripod to avoid
camera shake.
Make sure that the lens is clean. If not, clean the lens. (p. 111)
•
•
•
The colors in the photo do not
match the actual scene
An incorrect white balance can create unrealistic color. Select the proper white balance
option to suit the light source. (p. 68)
The photo is too bright
Your photo is overexposed.
Adjust the exposure value. (p. 66)
Adjust the aperture value or the shutter speed. (p. 41)
Turn off the flash. (p. 55)
Adjust the ISO speed. (p. 59)
•
•
•
•
The photo is too dark
Your photo is underexposed.
Adjust the exposure value.
Adjust the aperture value or the shutter speed.
Turn on the flash.
Adjust the ISO speed.
•
•
•
•
The photo is distorted The wide-angle lens may distort the image. This is a normal feature of the wide-angle lens.117
Before contacting a service center
Situation Suggested remedies
The TV does not display your
photos
Make sure that the camera is correctly connected to the TV with the A/V and HDMI
cable.
Make sure that your memory card contains photos.
•
•
Your computer does not
recognize your camera
Make sure that the USB cable is connected correctly.
Make sure that your camera is switched on.
Make sure that you are using a supported operating system.
•
•
•
Your computer disconnects the
camera while transferring files
The fi le transmission may be interrupted by static electricity. Disconnect the USB cable,
and then connect it again.118
Camera specifications
Specification
Image
Sensor
Type CMOS
Sensor size 23.4×15.6mm
Effective Pixel Approx. 14.6 Mega-pixels
Total Pixel Approx. 15.1 Mega-pixels
Color Filter RGB primary color filter
Lens Mount Samsung NX Mount
Usable Lens Samsung Lenses
Image
Stabilization
Type Lens Shift (depends on
Lens)
Display Type LCD
Size 3.0”
Resolution QVGA (320x240). Approx.
230K dots
Live view Field of view : Approx. 98%
Viewfinder Type EVF
Resolution QVGA Class (300X220).
Approx. 201K dots equiv.
Field of View Approx. 98%
Magnification Approx. 0.83x (APS-C,
50mm, -1m-1)
Eyepoint About 17 mm
Diopter
Adjustment
Approx. -4.0 ~ +1.0m-1
Specification
Focusing Type Contrast AF
Focusing point Selection : 1point (Free
selection)
Multi : Normal 15points,
Close Up 35points
Face Detection : Max.
10faces
Modes Single AF, Continuous AF,
MF
AF-assist lamp Yes (Green LED)
Shutter Type Electronically controlled
vertical-run focal plane
shutter
Speed Auto:1/4000sec. ~ 30sec.
Manual:1/4000sec. ~
30sec. (1/3EV or 1/2EV
step)
Bulb (Limit time : 8 min)
Exposure Metering
System
TTL 247 (19x13) Block
segment
Metering : Multi, Centerweighted, Spot
Metering range : EV0 ~ 18
(ISO100·30mm F2.0)
Compensation ±3 EV (1/2EV, 1/3EV step)
AE Lock AEL button
ISO Equivalent Auto, 100, 200, 400, 800,
1600, 3200 (1EV step)119
Camera specifications
Specification
Drive Mode Modes Single, Continuous, Burst,
Self-timer, Bracket (AE, WB,
PW)
Continuous JPEG : 3fps up to 10shots,
Burst mode : 30fps,
30shots by 1 released
RAW : 3fps up to 3shots
Bracket Auto Exposure Bracket
(±3EV), White Balance
Bracket (±3step), Picture
Wizard Bracket (Selectable
3modes)
Self-timer 2-30sec. (1sec. step)
Remote
controller
Wired : SR9NX01 (Optional)
Specification
Flash Type TTL Auto Pop-up flash
Modes Smart Flash, Auto, Auto +
Red-eye reduction, Fill-in,
Fill-in + Red-eye reduction,
1
st Curtain, 2nd Curtain, OFF
Guide Number 11 (at ISO 100)
Angle of View
Coverage
28mm wide-angle
(Equivalent to 35mm)
Sync. Speed Less than 1/180sec.
Flash
Compensation
-2 - +2EV (0.5EV step)
External Flash Samsung External Flash
available (SEF42A,
SEF20A) (optional)
Synchro
(Flash
attachment)
Hot Shoe
White
Balance
Modes Auto, Daylight, Cloudy,
Fluorescent (W, N, D),
Tungsten, Flash, Custom,
K(Manual)
Micro
adjustment
Each 7steps in Amber /
Blue / Green / Magenta axis
Picture
Wizard
Modes Standard, Vivid, Portrait,
Landscape, Forest, Retro,
Cool, Calm, Classic,
Custom (1-3)
Parameter Contrast, Sharpness,
Saturation, Color tone120
Camera specifications
Specification
Shooting Modes Smart Auto, Program,
Shutter Priority AE, Aperture
Priority AE, Manual, Night,
Portrait, Landscape, Scene,
Movie
Scene Mode Beauty shot, Children,
Close Up, Text, Sunset,
Dawn, Backlight, Fireworks,
Beach & Snow
Image Size JPEG (3:2):
14M (4592x3056),
10M (3872x2592),
6M (3008x2000),
2M (1920x1280),
1.4M (1472x976):
Burst mode only
JPEG (16:9):
12M (4592x2584),
8M (3872x2176),
5M (3008x1688),
2M (1920x1080)
RAW: 14M (4592x3056)
Quality Super fine , Fine, Normal
RAW Format SRW
Color Space sRGB, Adobe RGB
Specification
Movie Format MP4 (H.264)
Compression Movie : H.264 , Sound :
AAC
Movie Clip With Audio or without Audio
(user selectable, recording
time : 25 minutes)
Image size 1280x720 , 640x480 ,
320x240
Frame rate 30fps
Sound Mono Sound
Movie Editing Still Image Capture, Time
Trimming
Image Play Type Single image, Thumbnails
(3/9/20 images), Slide
show, Movie
Highlight
Warning
Available
Editing Red eye fix, Back light
comp., Photo Style Selector,
Resize, Rotate, Face
Retouch
Photo Style
Selector
Soft, Vivid, Forest, Autumn,
Misty, Gloomy, Classic121
Camera specifications
Specification
Storage Media External memory
card(optional): SD card
(up to 4GB guaranteed),
SDHC card (up to 8GB
guaranteed)
File Format RAW (SRW), JPEG (EXIF
2.21), DCF, DPOF 1.1,
PictBridge 1.0
Capacity
(1GB)
14M : RAW 35
14M : Super Fine 142, Fine
278, Normal 408
10M : Super Fine 197, Fine
382, Normal 724
6M : Super Fine 322, Fine
615, Normal 1128
2M : Super Fine 738, Fine
1334, Normal 2238
Burst (1.4M) : Super Fine
1201, Fine 2092, Normal
3320
12M(W) : Super Fine 168,
Fine 328, Normal 630
8M(W) : Super Fine 234, Fine
454, Normal 860
5M(W) : Super Fine 381, Fine
727, Normal 1334
2M(W) : Super Fine 872, Fine
1573, Normal 2638
Movie : 1280x720 : High
Quality 15min., Normal 22min.
640x480 : High Quality
44min., Normal 66min.
320x240 : High Quality
145min., Normal 210min.
※ These figures are
measured under the
Samsung standard
Specification
Direct Printing PictBridge
Interface Digital Output
Connector
USB 2.0 (HI-SPEED)
Video output NTSC, PAL (user selectable)
HDMI 1.3 : (1080i, 720P,
576P / 480P)
External
Release
Yes
DC power input
connector
DC 9.0V, 1.5A (100 ~ 240V)
Power
Source
Type
Rechargeable battery :
BP1310 (1300mAh)
Charger: BC1310
AC Adaptor : AD9NX01
(Optional)
* Included battery may vary
depending on sales region
Physical
Specification
Dimensions
(WxHxD)
123×87×39.8mm
(excluding the projecting
parts of the camera)
Weight 345g (without batteries and
card)
Operating
Temperature
0 ~ 40 °C
Operating
Humidity
5 ~ 85%
Software Application Intelli-studio, Samsung RAW
Converter
* Specifications are subject to change without prior notice
* All trademarks are the property of their respective owners122
The lens provided may differ by the model.
Lens specifications
Lens Name SAMSUNG 30mm F2 SAMSUNG 18-55mm
F3.5-5.6 OIS
SAMSUNG 50-200mm
F4-5.6 ED OIS
Focal Length 30mm (equivalent to
46.2mm in 35mm format)
18 - 55mm (equivalent to
27.7-84.7mm in 35mm
format)
50 - 200mm (equivalent to
77-308mm in 35mm format)
Elements in Groups 5 elements in 5 groups
(1 Aspherical lens included)
12 elements in 9 groups
(1 Aspherical lens included)
17 elements in 13 groups
(2 Extra-low Dispersion lens
included)
Angle of View 50.2° 75.9°- 28.7° 31.4°- 8.0°
Aperture
F2 (Min. F22), (Number of
Blades : 7 , Circular Aperture
Diaphragm)
F3.5 - 5.6 (Min. F22),
(Number of Blades : 7 ,
Circular Aperture Diaphragm)
F4 - 5.6 (Min. F22), (Number
of Blades : 7 , Circular
Aperture Diaphragm)
Mount Type Samsung NX Mount Samsung NX Mount Samsung NX Mount
Optical Image Stabilizer No Yes Yes
Minimum Focus Distance 0.25m ~ Ğ 0.28m ~ Ğ 0.98m ~ Ğ
Maximum Magnification Approx. 0.16X Approx. 0.22X Approx. 0.2X
Lens Hood Optional Included Included
Filter Size 43mm 58mm 52mm
Max. Diameter x Length 61.5 x 21.5mm 63 x 65.1mm 70 x 100.5mm
Weight Approx. 85g (without hood) Approx. 198g (without hood) Approx. 417g (without hood)
Operating Temperature 0 ~ 40°C 0 ~ 40°C 0 ~ 40°C
Operating Humidity 5 ~ 85% 5 ~ 85% 5 ~ 85%123
Accessories (optional items)
Lens
Make better pictures with a 30mm, 18-55mm, or 50-200mm lens made exclusively
for the Samsung NX-series camera.
Memory card
In this camera, the memory cards such as SD (Secure Digital) and SDHC (Secure
Digital High Capacity) may be used.
A/V cable
The camera can be connected to an external device by using an A/V cable.
Shutter release
This product minimizes the possible shaking of camera when taking pictures by using
a tripod or taking pictures at a low shutter speed.
Adaptor
The power needed in the camera can be supplied by connecting to a power socket
using this adaptor.124
Accessories(optional items)
Strap
Straps can be purchased separately.
Camera bag
Camera bag can be purchased separately.
Filter
Optional filters can be purchased and attached to the lens.
Flash
Optional flash(SEF20A or SEF42A) can be purchased for your various shooting
experience.
HDMI Cable
You can view high-quality and uncompressed photos or videos on an HDMI (High
Definition Multimedia Interface) using the optional HDMI cable.
Battery pack
Battery pack can be purchased separately.
The image of components or optional parts can differ from that of actual products.
Please refer to the user's manual of the optional items.125
Index
A
Adjusting exposure 5
Automatic focus 34
Aperture priority mode 41
Aperture value 41
AF Priority 60
AF assist light 61
AE BKT 73
AEL function 77
AF Sound 105
Anynet+ 108
Appendixes 109
Accessories (optional items) 123
B
Background 7
Bulb exposure 44
Bracket setup 74
Backlight adjustment 88
Button sound 105
Battery 18, 115
C
Composition 7
Close-up 39
Continuous AF 60
Center-weighted metering 67
Color temperature 70
Color space 71
Changing the shooting method 73
Continuous shooting 73
Camera maintenance 111
Camera specifications 118
D
Direction keys 5
Diopter adjustment dial 16
Display type 28
Depth of field 37
Depth Preview 37
Deleting a file 82
Display 105
Display Select 108
Date&Time 107
E
Eye sensor 15
Eye-cup 16
EV button 43
External flash 58
Error message 110
F
Fn 27
Flash popup button 55
Focusing methods 60
Face detection 64
File protection 82
Face retouching 88
Format 106
File name 106
File number 106
Folder type 106
Firmware update 108
H
Half-shutter 32
HDTV 92
HDMI Size 108
I
ISO sensitivity 59
Icons 25
Image stabilization 32
Index printing 90
Intelli-studio 97
J
JPEG 101
K
Key mapping 77
L
Lens 17
Landscape mode 45
Language 105
Lens specifications 122
M
Mounting/dismounting the lens 21
Manual focus 33
Manual mode 43
Multi AF 61
MF Assist 63
Multi-metering 67126
Mac users 96
Memory card 112
N
Night mode 45
Noise reduction 53
O
Option/menu selection method 26
OIS 35
P
Program mode 40
Portrait mode 45
P Wiz BKT 73
Picture wizard 75
Playback 79
Picture editing 87
Picture style 88
Print info 89
Photo printer 102
PictBridge 102
Power save 107
Q
Quality 52
Quickview 105
R
Recording a movie 48
Resolution 51
Red-eye reduction 56
Rotating 87
Red-eye fix 88
Regular TV 91
RAW 101
Reset 106
S
Shooting mode 5
Subject 7
Status lamp 16
Strap 22
Sound 29
Screen display 30
Smart Auto mode 39
Shutter Priority mode 42
Shutter speed 42
Scene mode 46
Setting the flash option 55
Single AF 60
Selection AF 61
Self-portrait face detection 65
Spot metering 67
Smart range 72
Shooting method 73
Smart album 81
Slide show 84
Samsung Raw Converter 99
System volume 105
T
Title and role of each part 14
Turning on the power 23
Tips 32
Timer 54
Thumbnail view 81
U
Unpacking 13
Using the dial 26
User display 29
V
View a movie 85
Video Out 108
W
Wind Cut 49
White balance 68
Windows users 93
WB BKT 73
Z
Zoom 34
1st Curtain 58
2nd Curtain 58
IndexCorrect Disposal of This Product
(Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)
(Applicable in the European Union and other European
countries with separate collection systems)
This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that
the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset,
USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste
at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the
environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal,
please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle
them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material
resources. Household users should contact either the retailer
where they purchased this product, or their local government
office, for details of where and how they can take these items for
environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact
their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase
contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be
mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal.
Correct disposal of batteries in this product
(Applicable in the European Union and other European
countries with separate battery return systems)
This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that
the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other
household waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the
chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains
mercury, cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive
2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances
can cause harm to human health or the environment.
To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please
separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them
through your local, free battery return system.
This Class [B] digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Planet First
Planet First represents Samsung Electronics'
commitment to the sustainable development and
social responsibility through eco-driven business
and management activities.Please refer to the warranty that came with your product or visit our website
http://www.samsungimaging.com for after-sales service or inquiries.
I9105P
www.samsung.com
Consultez le mode d’emploi complet de votre appareil pour
obtenir davantage d’informations. Pour savoir comment
accéder au mode d’emploi, reportez-vous à la section
« Afficher le mode d’emploi » du présent Guide de prise en
main rapide.
Guide de prise en main
rapide2
www.sar-tick.com
Ce produit est conforme aux limites
nationales DAS (Débit d’Absorption
Spécifique) fixées à une valeur maximale
de 2,0 W/kg. Les valeurs DAS maximales
sont indiquées à la section Informations
sur la certification DAS de ce Guide de
prise en main rapide.
Lorsque vous transportez ce produit
ou lorsque vous l’utilisez près du
corps, portez-le à une distance d’au
moins 1,5 cm de votre corps afin de
respecter les exigences en matière de
radiofréquences.
Cet appareil vous permet de communiquer et d’accéder à
des divertissements de haute qualité, basés sur les critères
de qualité et la technologie de Samsung.
• Le contenu de ce guide de prise en main rapide peut
différer par rapport au produit ou à votre version
logicielle, et faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis.
• Les éléments fournis avec l’appareil et les accessoires
disponibles peuvent varier en fonction de votre zone
géographique ou votre opérateur.3
• Les accessoires fournis ont été spécifiquement conçus
pour cet appareil et peuvent ne pas fonctionner avec
d’autres appareils.
• Vous pouvez acheter d’autres accessoires auprès de votre
revendeur Samsung. Avant tout achat, assurez-vous qu’ils
sont compatibles avec votre appareil.
• Certains accessoires, autres que ceux fournis, peuvent ne
pas être compatibles avec votre appareil.
• Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des problèmes
de performance ou des incompatibilités découlant
de la modification des paramètres de registre par
l’utilisateur. Toute tentative de personnalisation du
système d’exploitation peut entraîner des problèmes de
fonctionnement de votre appareil ou de ses applications.4
Icônes
Avertissement : situations susceptibles de vous
blesser ou de blesser autrui.
Attention : situations susceptibles d’endommager
votre appareil ou d’autres équipements.
Remarque : remarques, conseils d’utilisation ou
informations complémentaires.
Droits d’auteur
Copyright © 2013 Samsung Electronics
Ce mode d’emploi est protégé par les lois internationales
sur les droits d’auteur.
Il est interdit de reproduire, distribuer, traduire ou
transmettre sous quelque forme et par quelque moyen
que ce soit, électronique ou mécanique, notamment par
photocopie, enregistrement ou stockage dans un système
de stockage et de recherche documentaire, tout ou partie
de ce document, sans le consentement préalable écrit de
Samsung Electronics.5
Marques
• SAMSUNG et le logo SAMSUNG sont des marques
déposées de Samsung Electronics.
• Les logos Android, Google
™, Google Maps
™, Google
Mail
™, YouTube
™, Google Play
™ Store et Google Talk
™
sont des marques de Google, Inc.
• Bluetooth® est une marque déposée de Bluetooth SIG,
Inc.
• Wi-Fi
®, Wi-Fi Protected Setup
™, Wi-Fi Direct
™, Wi-Fi
CERTIFIED™ et le logo Wi-Fi sont des marques déposées
de Wi-Fi Alliance.
Votre appareil utilise une fréquence non harmonisée. Il
est conçu pour fonctionner dans tous les pays européens.
Au sein de l’Union Européenne, le réseau Wi-Fi peut
fonctionner sans restriction en intérieur, mais pas en
extérieur.
• Toutes les autres marques et droits d’auteur demeurent la
propriété de leurs propriétaires respectifs.6
Démarrage
Présentation de l’appareil
Touche Retour
Microphone
Capteur de
proximité/
luminosité
Connecteur à
fonctions multiples
Microphone pour
haut-parleur
Touche Menu
Écouteur
Écran tactile
Touche Accueil
Touche de volume
Objectif avant7
Démarrage
Prise audio 3,5 mm
Objectif arrière
Haut-parleur
Antenne GPS
Flash
Touche
Marche/Arrêt
Antenne principale
Cache arrière
Ne couvrez pas la zone autour de l’antenne avec
vos mains ou tout autre objet. Cela pourrait
entraîner des problèmes de connectivité ou
décharger la batterie.8
Démarrage
Touches
Touche Fonction
Marche/
Arrêt
• Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour
allumer ou éteindre l’appareil.
• Maintenir cette touche enfoncée
pendant 8 à 10 secondes pour
réinitialiser l’appareil en cas d’erreur
fatale, ou s’il ne répond plus ou mal.
• Appuyer sur cette touche pour
verrouiller ou déverrouiller l’appareil.
Lorsque l’écran s’éteint, l’appareil passe
en mode Verrouillage.
Menu
• Appuyer sur cette touche pour ouvrir
la liste des options disponibles dans
l’écran actuel.
• Depuis l’écran d’accueil, maintenir
cette touche enfoncée pour lancer
l’application de recherche Google.
Accueil
• Appuyer sur cette touche pour revenir
à l’écran d’accueil.
• Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour
ouvrir la liste des applications récentes.
Retour
• Appuyer sur cette touche pour revenir
à l’écran précédent.9
Démarrage
Touche Fonction
Volume
• Appuyer sur cette touche pour régler le
volume de l’appareil.
Installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la
batterie
Insérez la carte SIM ou USIM fournie par votre opérateur,
ainsi que la batterie.
1 Retirez le cache arrière.
Veillez à ne pas abîmer vos ongles en retirant le
cache arrière.10
Démarrage
2 Insérez la carte SIM ou USIM, puce orientée vers le bas.
Le compartiment pour carte SIM de votre appareil
ne convient qu’aux cartes SIM. Insérer une
carte microSIM avec un support inadapté peut
endommager le compartiment pour carte SIM de
votre appareil.
3 Insérez la batterie.
2 111
Démarrage
4 Remettez le cache arrière en place.
1
2
Charger la batterie
Vous devez charger la batterie avant d’utiliser l’appareil
pour la première fois lorsque vous ne l’avez pas utilisé
depuis un certain temps.
Utilisez uniquement des chargeurs, des batteries
et des câbles de connexion PC homologués par
Samsung. L’utilisation de chargeurs ou de câbles
non homologués peut provoquer l’éclatement de
la batterie ou endommager l’appareil.12
Démarrage
Branchez la fiche micro-USB du chargeur sur le connecteur
à fonctions multiples de l’appareil et l’autre extrémité sur
une prise de courant.
Un branchement incorrect du chargeur peut
sérieusement endommager l’appareil. Les dégâts
résultant d’une mauvaise utilisation ne sont pas
couverts par la garantie.
Lorsque la batterie est complètement chargée, déconnectez
l'appareil du chargeur. Pour ce faire, débranchez d’abord le
chargeur de l’appareil, puis de la prise de courant.
Ne retirez jamais la batterie avant d’avoir
débranché le chargeur. Ceci pourrait endommager
l’appareil.
Pour économiser l’énergie, débranchez le chargeur
lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. Le chargeur n’étant
pas muni d’un bouton Marche/Arrêt, vous devez
le débrancher de la prise de courant pour couper
l’alimentation. L’appareil doit rester à proximité de
la prise en cours de chargement.13
Démarrage
Vérifier la charge de la batterie
Lorsque vous chargez la batterie et que l’appareil est éteint,
les icônes suivantes indiquent l’état du chargement :
Chargement en cours Chargement terminé
Allumer et éteindre l’appareil
Si vous allumez l’appareil pour la première fois, suivez
les instructions affichées à l’écran pour procéder à sa
configuration.
Pour allumer et éteindre l’appareil, maintenez la touche
Marche/Arrêt enfoncée pendant quelques secondes.14
Fonctions de base
Notifications
Des icônes de notification peuvent apparaître dans le volet
des raccourcis afin de vous signaler les appels manqués,
les nouveaux messages, les événements à venir, le statut
de l’appareil, et plus encore. Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis,
puis affichez le statut de l'appareil, ainsi que les options
disponibles.
Pour ouvrir le volet des raccourcis, faites glisser la barre
d’état de haut en bas. Pour fermer le volet des raccourcis,
faites glisser la barre d’état de bas en haut.
La disponibilité des options dépend de votre zone
géographique ou de votre opérateur.15
Fonctions de base
Passer un appel ou y répondre
Découvrez comment utiliser les fonctions d’appel de votre
appareil : passer un appel, répondre à un appel, utiliser les
options disponibles en cours d’appel ou personnaliser les
autres fonctions.
Passer un appel
Composez le numéro à l’aide du clavier, puis appuyez sur .
Répondre à un appel
Lorsque vous recevez un appel, faites glisser votre doigt
sur l’icône .
Gérer les contacts
Pour tous vos contacts, vous pouvez enregistrer des
numéros de téléphone, des adresses e-mail, et plus encore.
Vous pouvez créer des groupes de contacts et également
envoyer leurs coordonnées à d’autres personnes ou les
partager.16
Fonctions de base
Envoyer des messages
Vous pouvez envoyer des messages texte (SMS) ou
multimédia (MMS).
L’envoi ou la réception de messages en dehors
de la zone couverte par votre opérateur peut
occasionner des frais supplémentaires, en fonction
de l’offre à laquelle vous avez souscrite. Pour en
savoir plus, contactez votre opérateur.
Utiliser les applications
La liste des applications affiche les icônes de toutes vos
applications, y compris celles récemment installées.
Pour ouvrir une application, ouvrez la liste des applications
et appuyez sur l’icône correspondante. Appuyez sur pour
fermer les applications.17
Fonctions de base
Accéder à Internet
Connectez-vous à Internet à l’aide de la fonction Wi-Fi ou de
votre connexion de données. Ouvrez l’application Internet
et naviguez sur les pages Web.
L’accès au Web et le téléchargement de
contenu multimédia peuvent entraîner des frais
supplémentaires, en fonction de l’offre souscrite
auprès de votre opérateur. Pour en savoir plus,
contactez votre opérateur.
Utiliser la fonction NFC
Votre appareil est équipé d’une fonction qui permet de lire
les tags NFC (Near Field Communication) contenant des
informations relatives aux produits. Grâce à cette fonction,
vous pouvez également effectuer des paiements et
acheter des tickets de transport ou de spectacle après avoir
téléchargé les applications correspondantes.
La batterie comporte une antenne NFC intégrée.
Manipulez-la avec précaution afin de ne pas
endommager l’antenne NFC.18
Fonctions de base
Afficher le mode d’emploi
Le mode d’emploi vous fournit des informations complètes
sur le fonctionnement de votre appareil.
L’accès au Web et le téléchargement de
contenu multimédia peuvent entraîner des frais
supplémentaires, en fonction de l’offre souscrite
auprès de votre opérateur. Pour en savoir plus,
contactez votre opérateur.
À partir de votre appareil
1
Ouvrez l’application Internet.
2
Appuyez sur pour ouvrir la liste des favoris.
3 Sélectionnez le favori correspondant au mode d’emploi.
Pour accéder plus facilement au mode d’emploi, placez un
raccourci vers le mode d’emploi sur l’écran d’accueil.
Selon votre navigateur ou votre opérateur, le
mode d’emploi peut ne pas être disponible dans
les favoris.
À partir de l’ordinateur
Accédez au site www.samsung.com, puis recherchez
le mode d’emploi à l’aide du nom de modèle de votre
appareil.19
Consignes de sécurité
Ces consignes de sécurité concernent l’ensemble des appareils mobiles.
Il est possible qu’elles ne soient pas toutes applicables à votre appareil.
Avant d’utiliser cet appareil, lisez les consignes de sécurité afin d’éviter
de vous blesser ou de blesser autrui, ou d’endommager l’appareil.
Avertissement: évitez les décharges électriques, le
feu et les explosions
N’utilisez pas de prises et de cordons d’alimentation endommagé(e)s ou
de prises électriques mal fixées
Ne touchez pas le cordon d’alimentation avec les mains mouillées ou ne
déconnectez pas le chargeur en tirant sur le cordon
Ne tordez pas ou n’endommagez pas le cordon d’alimentation
N’utilisez pas votre appareil avec les mains mouillées ou lorsque celui-ci
est en cours de chargement
Ne provoquez pas de court-circuit avec le chargeur ou l’appareil
Ne laissez pas tomber le chargeur ou l’appareil et ne les exposez pas
aux chocs
Ne rechargez pas la batterie avec un chargeur non approuvé par le
fabricant
N’utilisez pas votre appareil pendant un orage
L’appareil peut mal fonctionner et les risques de décharge électrique peuvent
augmenter.
Ne manipulez pas la batterie Lithium Ion (Li-Ion) lorsque celle-ci coule
ou est endommagée
Pour une mise au rebut en toute sécurité de la batterie Li-Ion, contactez le
centre de service après-vente le plus proche de chez vous.20
Consignes de sécurité
Manipulez et jetez l’appareil et le chargeur avec précaution
• Utilisez exclusivement une batterie et un chargeur homologués par
Samsung et spécialement conçus pour votre appareil. L’utilisation d’une
batterie et d’un chargeur incompatibles peut provoquer des blessures
graves ou endommager votre appareil.
• Ne jetez jamais la batterie ou l’appareil au feu. Respectez la
réglementation en vigueur dans votre pays concernant la mise au rebut
des batteries ou des appareils usagés.
• Ne posez jamais la batterie ou l’appareil à l’intérieur ou au-dessus
d’appareils chauffants, tels que des fours à micro-ondes, des cuisinières ou
des radiateurs. En cas de surchauffe, ils pourraient exploser.
• N’écrasez ou ne perforez jamais l’appareil. Évitez d’exposer l’appareil à une
pression externe élevée qui risquerait d’entraîner un court-circuit interne
et une surchauffe.
Protégez l’appareil, la batterie et le chargeur de tout dommage
• Évitez d’exposer l’appareil et la batterie à des températures très basses
ou très élevées.
• Ne soumettez pas l’appareil à des températures extrêmes, car cela pourrait
l’endommager, ou réduire la capacité de chargement et la durée de vie de
l’appareil et de la batterie.
• Évitez que la batterie entrent en contact avec des objets métalliques, car
cela risquerait de provoquer un court-circuit entre les bornes + et – de la
batterie et de l’endommager de manière temporaire ou permanente.
• N’utilisez jamais une batterie ou un chargeur endommagé(e).
Attention: respectez tous les avertissements de
sécurité et les réglementations en vigueur lorsque
vous utilisez votre appareil dans un endroit où son
utilisation est réglementée
N’utilisez pas votre appareil à proximité d’autres appareils électroniques
La plupart des appareils électroniques utilisent des signaux de
radiofréquence. Il est possible que votre appareil cause des interférences
avec d’autres appareils électroniques.21
Consignes de sécurité
N’utilisez pas votre appareil à proximité d’un stimulateur cardiaque
• Maintenez une distance minimale de 15 cm entre votre appareil et un
stimulateur cardiaque pour éviter toute interférence.
• Pour minimiser les risques d’interférence avec un stimulateur cardiaque,
utilisez l’appareil sur le côté opposé à l’implant.
N’utilisez pas votre appareil dans un hôpital ou à proximité
d’équipements médicaux en raison des interférences qu’il pourrait
produire
Si vous utilisez un équipement médical, contactez son fabricant avant
d’utiliser votre appareil afin de vous assurer que votre équipement ne sera
pas affecté par les radiofréquences émises par l’appareil.
Si vous utilisez une prothèse auditive, contactez votre fabriquant afin
d’obtenir plus d’informations sur les interférences
Les radiofréquences émises par votre appareil peuvent causer des
interférences avec certaines prothèses auditives. Avant d’utiliser votre
appareil, contactez le fabricant de la prothèse afin de vous assurer que
son fonctionnement ne sera pas altéré par les radiofréquences émises par
l’appareil.
Éteignez l’appareil dans les lieux présentant des risques d’explosion
• Éteignez l’appareil dans les lieux présentant des risques d’explosion.
• Respectez toujours les consignes, les instructions et la signalétique
d’utilisation dans un environnement explosif.
• N’utilisez pas votre appareil dans des zones de ravitaillement en carburant
(station-service), à proximité d’usines chimiques ou dans des zones de
dynamitage.
• Ne transportez et ne stockez jamais de liquides inflammables, de gaz
ou de matériaux explosifs dans le même habitacle que l’appareil, ses
composants ou ses accessoires.
Éteignez votre appareil lorsque vous vous trouvez dans un avion
Votre appareil peut provoquer des interférences avec les instruments de
navigation électroniques.22
Consignes de sécurité
Votre appareil peut provoquer des interférences avec les équipement
automobiles
Les équipements électroniques à bord de votre véhicule peuvent présenter
des dysfonctionnements en raison des interférences radio émises par votre
appareil. Contactez le constructeur pour obtenir plus d’informations.
Respectez toutes les consignes de sécurité et
réglementations relatives à l’utilisation de votre
appareil lorsque vous vous trouvez au volant d’un
véhicule
Votre responsabilité principale est avant tout de conduire votre véhicule
sans prendre de risques. N’utilisez jamais votre appareil au volant, si cela est
interdit par la loi. Pour votre propre sécurité et celle d’autrui, faites preuve de
bon sens et gardez à l’esprit les conseils suivants :
• Apprenez à connaître les fonctions pratiques de votre appareil, comme
par exemple la numérotation rapide et la fonction de rappel automatique.
Ces fonctions vous permettent de gagner du temps et de rester concentré
lorsque vous passez ou recevez des appels sur votre appareil.
• Gardez votre appareil à portée de main. Assurez-vous de pouvoir atteindre
votre appareil mobile sans quitter la route des yeux. Si vous recevez un
appel entrant à un moment inopportun, laissez votre messagerie vocale
répondre à votre place.
• Interrompez tout appel en cas d’embouteillages ou de conditions
météorologiques dangereuses. La pluie, la neige, le verglas et une
circulation dense sont des facteurs dangereux.
• Ne prenez pas de notes ou ne recherchez pas de numéros de téléphone.
Noter une liste de tâches à effectuer ou parcourir votre répertoire
détourne votre attention de votre responsabilité principale qui consiste à
conduire sans prendre de risques.
• Composez des numéros de manière raisonnable et évaluez l’état de la
circulation. Passez vos appels lorsque vous êtes immobilisé ou avant
de vous insérer dans la circulation. Essayez de passer vos appels de
préférence lorsque votre véhicule est stationné.23
Consignes de sécurité
• Ne poursuivez pas de conversations stressantes ou émotionnelles qui
pourraient vous distraire. Informez vos interlocuteurs que vous êtes au
volant et interrompez toute conversation susceptible d’altérer votre
attention sur la route.
• Utilisez votre appareil pour demander de l’aide. En cas d’incendie,
d’accident de la route ou d’urgence médicale, composez le numéro
d’urgence local.
• Utilisez votre appareil pour aider d’autres personnes en situation
d’urgence. Si vous êtes témoin d’un accident, d’une agression ou de toute
autre situation d’urgence mettant des vies en jeu, contactez les services
d’urgence locaux.
• Appelez un service d’assistance dépannage ou un service spécial
d’assistance, si cela s’avère nécessaire. Si vous croisez un véhicule
endommagé ne présentant pas de danger immédiat, si vous constatez
un feu rouge cassé, un accident de la route sans gravité où personne ne
semble blessé ou encore un véhicule que vous savez volé, appelez un
service d’assistance dépannage ou un service spécial d’assistance autre
que les services d’urgence.
Pour entretenir et bien utiliser votre appareil
Conservez votre appareil au sec
• L’humidité et les liquides peuvent endommager les pièces ou les circuits
électroniques de votre appareil.
• N’allumez pas votre appareil s’il présente des marques d’humidité. Si
votre appareil est déjà allumé, éteignez-le, puis retirez immédiatement
la batterie (si vous n’arrivez pas à l’éteindre ou à retirer la batterie, laissez
votre appareil tel quel). Essuyez-le ensuite à l’aide d’une serviette et
confiez-le à un centre de service après-vente Samsung.
• Les liquides modifient la couleur de l’étiquette indiquant que l’intérieur
de l’appareil a été endommagé. L’eau peut endommager votre appareil et
entraîner l’annulation de la garantie du fabricant.24
Consignes de sécurité
Cet appareil ne doit pas être utilisé ou stocké dans des zones où la
concentration de poussières ou de microparticules en suspension dans
l’atmosphère est élevée
La poussière ou les microparticules peuvent provoquer des
dysfonctionnements de l’appareil et entraîner des incendies ou des chocs
électriques.
Posez toujours votre appareil sur des surfaces planes
Si votre appareil tombe, il peut être endommagé.
N’entreposez pas votre appareil dans des endroits extrêmement chauds
ou froids. Il est recommandé d’utiliser cet appareil à des températures
comprises entre 5 °C et 35 °C
• Votre appareil peut exploser si vous le laissez dans un véhicule fermé, la
température intérieure pouvant monter jusqu’à 80 °C.
• N’exposez pas votre appareil à la lumière directe du soleil de manière
prolongée (comme par exemple sur le tableau de bord d’une voiture).
• Conservez la batterie à des températures comprises entre 0 °C et 45 °C.
N’entreposez pas votre appareil à proximité d’objets métalliques,
comme par exemple des pièces, des clés ou des colliers
• Votre appareil pourrait être rayé ou subir des dysfonctionnements.
• Les bornes de la batterie peuvent causer des incendies si elles sont mises
en contact avec des objets métalliques.
Ne conservez pas votre appareil à proximité de champs magnétiques
• Lorsqu’il est exposé à des champs magnétiques, votre appareil peut subir
des dysfonctionnements ou la batterie peut se décharger.
• Les cartes à piste, comme par exemple les cartes de crédit, les cartes de
téléphone et les cartes d’embarquement peuvent être endommagées par
les champs magnétiques.
• N’utilisez pas de housses ou d’accessoires équipés de fermetures
aimantées et évitez toute exposition prolongée de votre appareil à des
champs magnétiques.25
Consignes de sécurité
Ne conservez pas votre appareil à proximité ou à l’intérieur de
radiateurs, de fours à micro-ondes, d’équipements de cuisine chauffants
ou de conteneurs à haute pression
• La batterie peut couler.
• Votre appareil peut surchauffer et causer un incendie.
Ne laissez pas tomber votre appareil et ne l’exposez pas aux chocs
• L’écran de votre appareil pourrait être endommagé.
• Votre appareil peut être endommagé ou certaines pièces peuvent subir
des dysfonctionnements si vous le tordez ou le déformez.
En cas de surchauffe de l’appareil, n’utilisez pas ce dernier ainsi que ses
applications pendant quelques temps
Un contact prolongé de votre peau avec un appareil en surchauffe peut
entraîner des symptômes de brûlure faible, tels que des points rouges et de
pigmentation.
Si l’appareil photo de votre appareil est équipé d’un flash, ne l’utilisez
pas à proximité des yeux des personnes ou des animaux
Utiliser un flash à proximité des yeux peut causer des lésions oculaires ou une
perte temporaire de la vue.
Prenez des précautions lorsque vous êtes exposé aux lumières
artificielles
• Lorsque vous utilisez votre appareil, ne laissez pas la pièce dans laquelle
vous vous trouvez dans l’obscurité et ne rapprochez pas trop l’écran de
vos yeux.
• L’exposition à la luminosité de l’écran lors du visionnage prolongé de
vidéos ou de jeux peut entraîner des malaises. En cas de sensations
d’inconfort, cessez immédiatement d’utiliser l’appareil.26
Consignes de sécurité
Réduisez les risques de lésions musculaires dus aux mouvements
répétitifs
Lorsque vous effectuez des actions répétitives, comme taper sur les touches,
dessiner des caractères sur un écran tactile ou jouer à des jeux, vous pouvez
ressentir une sensation d’inconfort au niveau des mains, de la nuque, des
épaules ou de toute autre partie du corps. Si vous utilisez votre appareil sur
des périodes prolongées, tenez-le sans trop le serrer, appuyez doucement sur
les touches et faites des pauses fréquentes. En cas de sensations d’inconfort,
cessez immédiatement d’utiliser l’appareil et consultez un médecin.
Préservez la durée de vie de la batterie et du chargeur
• Évitez de laisser l’appareil en charge pendant plus d’une semaine, car une
surcharge pourrait réduire la durée de vie de la batterie.
• Lorsqu’il n’est pas utilisé pendant une durée prolongée, votre appareil se
décharge progressivement et devra être rechargé avant toute utilisation.
• Débranchez le chargeur de la prise secteur lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas.
• Utilisez uniquement la batterie dans le cadre de l’utilisation prévue.
Utilisez des batteries, des chargeurs, des accessoires et des fournitures
homologués
• L’utilisation d’une batterie ou d’un chargeur générique peut réduire la
durée de vie de votre appareil ou provoquer des dysfonctionnements.
• Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable de la sécurité de l’utilisateur
si celui-ci utilise des accessoires ou des éléments non homologués par
Samsung.
Ne mordez et ne portez pas à votre bouche l’appareil ou la batterie
• Vous pourriez endommager l’appareil ou provoquer une explosion.
• Assurez-vous que les enfants manipulent l’appareil de façon appropriée
s’ils doivent l’utiliser.
Ne mettez pas votre appareil ou ses accessoires dans vos yeux, vos
oreilles ou votre bouche
Vous pourriez vous étouffer ou vous blesser gravement.27
Consignes de sécurité
Lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil :
• Tenez l’appareil droit, comme vous le feriez avec un téléphone
traditionnel.
• Parlez directement dans le microphone.
• Ne touchez pas l’antenne interne de l’appareil. Cela pourrait entraîner une
dégradation de la qualité de l’appel ou provoquer l’émission de niveaux de
radiofréquences (RF) inattendus.
Protégez votre oreille lorsque vous utilisez un casque ou des écouteurs
• Une exposition excessive de votre oreille à un volume élevé peut
endommager votre audition.
• Une exposition excessive de votre oreille à un volume élevé lorsque vous
êtes au volant peut détourner votre attention et provoquer un accident.
• Diminuez toujours le volume avant de connecter des écouteurs à une
source audio et réglez le volume minimum nécessaire vous permettant
d’entendre votre conversation ou la musique.
• Dans les environnements secs, les casques et écouteurs sont propices à
la formation d’électricité statique. Évitez alors d’utiliser votre casque ou
vos écouteurs et touchez un objet métallique pour vous décharger de
toute électricité statique avant de brancher le casque/les écouteurs sur
l’appareil.
Restez prudent lorsque vous utilisez votre appareil en marchant ou en
bougeant
• Restez toujours conscient de votre environnement afin d’éviter de vous
blesser ou de blesser d’autres personnes.
• Assurez-vous de ne pas accrocher le cordon du casque avec vos bras ou
avec des objets à proximité.28
Consignes de sécurité
Ne placez pas votre appareil dans vos poches arrières ou à votre ceinture
Vous pourriez vous blesser ou endommager votre appareil en cas de chute.
Ne démontez pas, ne modifiez pas ou ne réparez pas vous-même votre
appareil
• Toute modification ou tout changement effectué(e) sur votre appareil
peut entraîner l’annulation de la garantie du fabricant. Si votre appareil
doit être réparé, confiez-le à un service après-vente Samsung.
• Ne démontez pas ou ne perforez pas la batterie, car ceci peut causer une
explosion ou un incendie.
Ne peignez jamais votre appareil et n’y apposez jamais d’autocollants
La peinture et les autocollants risquent de bloquer les pièces mobiles
de l’appareil et perturber son fonctionnement. Si vous êtes allergique à
la peinture ou aux pièces métalliques de l’appareil, vous pouvez souffrir
de démangeaisons, d’eczéma ou de toute autre réaction cutanée. Si ces
symptômes apparaissent, cessez immédiatement d’utiliser l’appareil et
consultez un médecin.
Pour nettoyer votre appareil:
• Essuyez votre appareil ou le chargeur avec un chiffon ou une gomme.
• Nettoyez les bornes de la batterie avec un morceau de coton ou un
chiffon.
• N’utilisez pas de produits chimiques ou de détergents.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil si son écran est fissuré ou cassé
Le verre ou l’acrylique brisé risque de vous blesser à la main ou au visage.
Confiez votre appareil à un service après-vente Samsung afin de le faire
réparer.
Utilisez votre appareil uniquement pour vous servir des fonctions
auxquelles il est destiné
Évitez de déranger votre entourage lorsque vous utilisez votre appareil
dans un lieu public
Ne laissez pas les enfants utiliser votre appareil
Cet appareil n’est pas un jouet. Ne laissez pas les enfants jouer avec, car ils
pourraient se blesser ou blesser autrui, et endommager l’appareil.29
Consignes de sécurité
Installez l’appareil et ses accessoires avec précaution
• Veillez à la bonne fixation de votre appareil mobile et de ses accessoires
dans votre véhicule.
• Évitez de placer votre appareil ou ses accessoires à proximité de la zone
de déploiement des airbags. Si l’équipement mobile n’est pas installé
correctement, le déclenchement de l’airbag risque de provoquer des
blessures graves.
Toute réparation doit être réalisée par un technicien agréé
Le recours aux services d’un technicien non agréé risque d’entraîner des
dégâts sur l’appareil et d’annuler la garantie du fabricant.
Manipulez les cartes SIM et les cartes mémoire avec soin
• Ne retirez pas une carte lorsque l’appareil y enregistre ou y lit des
informations, car vous risqueriez de perdre des données et/ou
d’endommager la carte ou l’appareil lui-même.
• Protégez les cartes contre les chocs violents, les décharges
électrostatiques et les interférences émises par d’autres appareils.
• Ne touchez pas les contacts dorés de la carte avec vos doigts ou avec des
objets métalliques. Si la carte est sale, nettoyez-la avec un chiffon doux.
Assurez l’accès aux services d’urgence
Dans certaines zones ou dans certaines circonstances, il peut être impossible
de joindre les numéros d’urgence avec votre appareil. Avant de vous rendre
dans des régions isolées ou non couvertes, prévoyez un autre moyen pour
contacter les services d’urgence.
Protégez vos données importantes
• Lorsque vous utilisez votre appareil, assurez-vous de sauvegarder vos
données importantes. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable de la perte
de données.
• Lors de la mise au rebut de votre appareil, sauvegardez l’ensemble de vos
données, puis réinitialisez votre appareil afin d’éviter tout usage abusif de
vos données personnelles.
• Veuillez lire attentivement les données d’autorisation lors du
téléchargement d’applications. Soyez particulièrement vigilant lors de
l’utilisation d’applications ayant accès à de nombreuses fonctions ou à un
volume important de données personnelles.30
Consignes de sécurité
• Vérifiez régulièrement vos comptes afin de détecter toute utilisation non
autorisée ou suspecte. Si vous identifiez des signes indiquant un usage
abusif de vos informations personnelles, contactez votre opérateur pour
supprimer ou modifier les informations relatives à votre compte.
• Si vous avez perdu votre appareil ou s’il vous a été volé, modifiez les mots
de passe de vos comptes afin de protéger vos informations personnelles.
• Évitez d’utiliser des applications provenant de sources inconnues et
verrouillez votre appareil à l’aide d’un modèle, d’un mot de passe ou
d’un code PIN.
Ne transmettez pas d’éléments protégés par des droits d’auteur
Ne transmettez pas d’éléments protégés par des droits d’auteur sans la
permission des détenteurs de ces droits. Dans le cas contraire, vous seriez
en infraction avec la législation sur les droits d’auteur. Le fabricant n’est en
aucun cas responsable de l’utilisation frauduleuse des éléments protégés par
les droits d’auteur.
Informations sur la certification DAS
CET APPAREIL MOBILE EST CONFORME AUX DIRECTIVES
INTERNATIONALES SUR L’EXPOSITION AUX RADIOFRÉQUENCES
Cet appareil mobile est un émetteur-récepteur radio. Il a été conçu
pour ne pas dépasser les limites d’exposition aux radiofréquences (RF)
recommandées par les directives internationales et en vigueur en France. Ces
directives, développées par un organisme scientifique indépendant (ICNIRP),
tiennent compte d’une marge importante de sécurité permettant d’assurer la
sécurité des personnes, quels que soient leur âge et leur état de santé.
La valeur utilisée dans le cadre de ces directives est le DAS, ou débit
d’absorption spécifique. Pour les appareils mobiles, la valeur DAS maximale
autorisée est de 2,0 watts par kilogramme (W/Kg). Le DAS est mesuré en
utilisant l’appareil mobile dans des conditions de fonctionnement standard
et en balayant l’ensemble des fréquences. Valeurs DAS maximales pour ce
modèle, conformément aux directives ICNIRP :31
Consignes de sécurité
Valeurs DAS maximales pour ce modèle
DAS au niveau de la tête 0,327 W/Kg
DAS au niveau du corps 0,326 W/Kg
Lorsque l’appareil est en fonctionnement, le niveau de DAS réel de cet
appareil est généralement beaucoup plus faible que les valeurs indiquées
ci-dessus. En effet, pour des raisons d’efficacité du système et pour réduire les
interférences au niveau du réseau, la puissance utile de votre appareil mobile
est automatiquement réduite lorsque la transmission du signal ne nécessite
pas une pleine puissance.
Des essais DAS ont été réalisés avec ce produit porté à une distance de
1,5 cm du corps. Afin de respecter les exigences en matière d’exposition aux
radiofréquences, cet appareil doit être positionné à une distance de 1,5 cm
du corps.
Cependant, quelques dispositions simples peuvent contribuer à diminuer le
niveau d’exposition aux radiofréquences. Ainsi, afin de réduire au maximum
la puissance d’émission de votre appareil mobile, veillez à l’utiliser dans des
conditions de réception optimales, l’indicateur de puissance du signal affiché
à l’écran comportant alors un nombre suffisant de barres. En général, plus
vous êtes proche d’un relais, plus la puissance utilisée par l’appareil mobile
est faible.
Les informations scientifiques actuelles n’indiquent en rien que l’utilisation
des appareils mobiles exige de prendre de quelconques précautions
spéciales. Cependant, des organismes tels que l’Organisation Mondiale de
la Santé et la Food and Drug Administration recommandent aux personnes
souhaitant minimiser leur exposition aux radiofréquences de réduire la durée
d’utilisation de l’appareil ou d’utiliser autant que possible un kit mains-libres
permettant d’éloigner l’appareil mobile de leur tête et de leur corps durant
son utilisation. Cependant, on veillera dans ce cas à éloigner le téléphone du
ventre des femmes enceintes et du bas ventre des enfants et des adolescents.
Pour plus d’informations, visitez le site www.samsung.com/sar et recherchez
votre appareil à l’aide du numéro de modèle.32
Consignes de sécurité
Les bons gestes de mise au rebut de ce produit
(Déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques)
(Applicable aux pays disposant de systèmes de collecte séparés)
Ce symbole sur le produit, ses accessoires ou sa documentation indique
que ni le produit, ni ses accessoires électroniques usagés (chargeur, casque
audio, câble de connexion, etc.), ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets
ménagers.
La mise au rebut incontrôlée des déchets présentant des risques
environnementaux et de santé publique, veuillez séparer vos produits et
accessoires usagés des autres déchets. Vous favoriserez ainsi le recyclage de
la matière qui les compose dans le cadre d’un développement durable.
Les particuliers sont invités à contacter le magasin leur ayant vendu le
produit ou à se renseigner auprès des autorités locales pour connaître les
procédures et les points de collecte de ces produits en vue de leur recyclage.
Les entreprises et professionnels sont invités à contacter leurs fournisseurs
et à consulter les conditions de leur contrat de vente. Ce produit et ses
accessoires ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets professionnels et
commerciaux.33
Consignes de sécurité
Élimination de la batterie de ce produit
(Applicable aux pays disposant de systèmes de collecte séparés)
Le symbole sur la batterie, le manuel ou l’emballage indique que la batterie
de ce produit ne doit pas être éliminée en fin de vie avec les autres déchets
ménagers. L’indication éventuelle des symboles chimiques Hg, Cd ou Pb
signifie que la batterie contient des quantités de mercure, de cadmium ou
de plomb supérieures aux niveaux de référence stipulés dans la directive
CE 2006/66. Si la batterie n’est pas correctement éliminée, ces substances
peuvent porter préjudice à la santé humaine ou à l’environnement.
Afin de protéger les ressources naturelles et d’encourager la réutilisation
du matériel, veillez à séparer la batterie des autres types de déchets et à la
recycler via votre système local de collecte gratuite des piles et batteries.
Limitation de responsabilité
Les contenus et les services accessibles par l’intermédiaire de cet appareil
appartiennent dans leur intégralité à des tiers et sont protégés par les lois sur
les droits d’auteur, les brevets, les marques et/ou d’autres lois sur la propriété
intellectuelle. Ces contenus et services sont fournis uniquement pour votre
usage personnel et non pour une utilisation commerciale. Vous ne pouvez
pas utiliser ces contenus ou services d’une manière qui n’a pas été autorisée
par le propriétaire des contenus ou le fournisseur des services. Sans que
cela ne limite ce qui précède, sauf autorisation expresse du propriétaire
de contenus ou du fournisseur de services concerné, il vous est interdit de
modifier, de copier, de republier, de transférer, de diffuser, de transmettre, de
traduire, de vendre, d’exploiter ou de distribuer, d’une quelconque manière
et sur quelque support que ce soit, des contenus ou des services affichés par
l’intermédiaire de cet appareil ou d’en créer des dérivés.34
Consignes de sécurité
LES CONTENUS ET SERVICES DE TIERS SONT FOURNIS “ EN L’ÉTAT “. DANS
TOUTE LA MESURE PERMISE PAR LA LOI LOCALE, SAMSUNG NE GARANTIT
PAS LES CONTENUS OU LES SERVICES AINSI FOURNIS, EXPRESSÉMENT
OU IMPLICITEMENT, À QUELQUE FIN QUE CE SOIT. SAMSUNG EXCLUT
EXPRESSÉMENT TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, SANS QUE
CELA SOIT LIMITATIF, LES GARANTIES DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET
D’ADÉQUATION À UN USAGE PARTICULIER. SAMSUNG NE GARANTIT PAS
L’EXACTITUDE, LA VALIDITÉ, L’ACTUALITÉ, LA LÉGALITÉ OU L’EXHAUSTIVITÉ
DES CONTENUS OU DES SERVICES FOURNIS PAR L’INTERMÉDIAIRE DE CET
APPAREIL, ET SAMSUNG NE SERA RESPONSABLE EN AUCUN CAS, Y COMPRIS
EN CAS DE NÉGLIGENCE, QUE CE SOIT AU TITRE DE LA RESPONSABILITÉ
CONTRACTUELLE OU DÉLICTUELLE, DES DOMMAGES DIRECTS, INDIRECTS,
ACCESSOIRES, SPÉCIAUX OU CONSÉCUTIFS, DES HONORAIRES D’AVOCAT,
DES FRAIS OU DE TOUT AUTRE DOMMAGE DÉCOULANT DE L’UTILISATION
DE TOUT CONTENU OU SERVICE PAR VOUS-MÊME OU PAR UN TIERS (OU
DE TOUTE INFORMATION FIGURANT DANS LEDIT CONTENU OU SERVICE),
MÊME SI SAMSUNG A ÉTÉ INFORMÉ DE L’ÉVENTUALITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES.
DANS LA MESURE OÙ CERTAINS PAYS N’AUTORISENT PAS L’EXCLUSION
DES GARANTIES IMPLICITES OU LA LIMITATION DES DROITS LÉGAUX DU
CONSOMMATEUR, IL EST POSSIBLE QUE CES EXCLUSIONS ET LIMITATIONS NE
VOUS SOIENT PAS APPLICABLES.
Les services tiers peuvent être suspendus ou interrompus à tout moment,
et Samsung ne garantit pas qu’un contenu ou un service restera disponible
pendant une certaine période. Les contenus et les services sont transmis
par des tiers au moyen de réseaux et d’équipements de transmission qui
échappent au contrôle de Samsung. Sans que cela ne limite le caractère
général du présent avis, Samsung décline expressément toute responsabilité
en cas d’interruption ou de suspension de tout contenu ou service fourni par
l’intermédiaire de cet appareil.
Samsung n’est pas responsable du service client lié aux contenus et aux
services. Toute question ou demande de service portant sur les contenus ou
les services doit être adressée directement aux fournisseurs de contenus et
de services concernés.Déclaration de conformité
Informations détaillées
Pour le produit suivant
Produit : Appareil mobile GSM WCDMA Bluetooth/WiFi
Modèle(s) : GT-I9105P
Déclaration et normes applicables
Nous déclarons par la présente que le produit ci-dessus est conforme aux exigences
essentielles de la directive R&TTE (1999/5/CE) en application des normes suivantes :
Sécurité EN 60950-1 : 2006 + A12 : 2011
DAS EN 50360 : 2001 / AC 2006
EN 62479 : 2010
EN 62311 : 2008
EN 62209 - 1 : 2006
EN 62209 - 2 : 2010
CEM EN 301 489-01 V1.9.2 (09-2011)
EN 301 489-07 V1.3.1 (11-2005)
EN 301 489-24 V1.5.1 (10-2010)
EN 301 489-03 V1.4.1 (08-2002)
EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1 (05-2009)
Radio EN 301 511 V9.0.2 (03-2003)
EN 301 908-2 V5.2.1 (07-2011)
EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (10-2006)
EN 300 440-1 V1.6.1 (08-2010)
EN 302 291-1 V1.1.1 (07-2005)
EN 301 908-1 V5.2.1 (05-2011)
EN 301 893 V1.6.1 (11-2011)
EN 300 440-2 V1.4.1 (08-2010)
EN 302 291-2 V1.1.1 (07-2005)
et de la directive (2011/65/UE) sur la restriction d’utilisation de certaines substances
dangereuses dans un équipement électrique et électronique.
La procédure de déclaration de conformité, définie dans l’article 10, puis reprise à l’alinéa
[IV] de la directive 1999/5/EC a été conduite sous contrôle de l’organisme suivant :
TÜV SÜD BABT, Forsyth House, Churchfield Road, Walton-on-Thames,
Surrey, KT12 2TD, UK*
Numéro d’identification : 0168
Représentant pour l’union européenne
Samsung Electronics Euro QA Lab.
Blackbushe Business Park, Saxony Way,
Yateley, Hampshire, GU46 6GG, UK*
2012.11.16 Joong-Hoon Choi / Directeur de laboratoire
(lieu et date de parution) (nom et signature du responsable dûment habilité)
* Il ne s’agit pas de l’adresse du service après-vente de Samsung. Pour obtenir l’adresse ou le numéro
de téléphone du service après-vente de Samsung, reportez-vous au certificat de garantie ou
contactez le revendeur auprès duquel vous avez acheté ce produit.Printed in Korea
GH68-37985A
French. 01/2013. Rev. 1.0
En fonction de votre zone géographique ou votre
opérateur, certains contenus peuvent différer par rapport à
votre appareil.
À propos de Samsung Kies
Samsung Kies est un logiciel qui permet de gérer et
de synchroniser vos bibliothèques multimédia et vos
contacts avec des appareils Samsung.
Téléchargez la dernière version de Samsung Kies à
partir du site Web Samsung (www.samsung.com/kies)
et installez-la sur votre ordinateur.
Protégez votre oreille lorsque vous utilisez un
casque ou des écouteurs
• Une exposition excessive de votre oreille à un
volume élevé peut endommager votre audition.
• Une exposition excessive de votre oreille à un
volume élevé lorsque vous êtes au volant peut
détourner votre attention et provoquer un
accident.
• Diminuez toujours le volume avant de connecter
des écouteurs à une source audio et réglez le
volume minimum nécessaire vous permettant
d’entendre votre conversation ou la musique.
• Dans les environnements secs, les casques et
écouteurs sont propices à la formation d’électricité
statique. Évitez alors d’utiliser votre casque ou vos
écouteurs et touchez un objet métallique pour
vous décharger de toute électricité statique avant
de brancher le casque/les écouteurs sur l’appareil.
SCX-3200 Series
Multi-Functional Mono Printer
User’s Guide
imagine the possibilities
Thank you for purchasing a Samsung product. Copyright_ 2
copyright
© 2010 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
This user’s guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice.
Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide.
• Samsung and the Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
• PCL and PCL 6 are trademarks fo Hewlett-Packard Company.
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Windows Server 2008 R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
• PostScript 3 is a trademark of Adobe System, Inc.
• USFT® and MicroType™ are registed trademarks of Monotype Imaging Inc.
• iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, TrueType, Mac and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S and other countries. AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are
trademarks of Apple Inc.
• LaserWriter is a trademark of Apple Inc.
• All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.
Refer to the 'LICENSE.txt' file in the provided CD-ROM for the open source license information.
REV. 1.01Safety information_ 3
safety information
These warnings and precautions are included to prevent injury to you and others, and to prevent any potential damage to
your machine. Be sure to read and understand all of these instructions before using the machine.
Use common sense for operating any electrical appliance and whenever using your machine. Also, follow all warnings and
instructions marked on the machine and in the accompanying literature. After reading this section, keep it in a safe place
for future reference.
IMPORTANT SAFETY SYMBOLS
This section explains the meanings of all icons and signs in the user's guide. These safety symbols are in order, according to the degree of
danger.
Explanation of all icons and signs used in the user’s guide:
Warning Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death.
Caution Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage.
Do not attempt.
Do not disassemble.
Do not touch.
Unplug the power cord from the wall socket.
Make sure the machine is grounded to prevent electric shock.
Call the service center for help.
Follow directions explicitly.
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Warning
Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the
electrical outlet is not grounded.
► This could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not bend, or place heavy objects on the power
cord.
► Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be
crushed by a heavy object could result in electric
shock or fire.
Do not place anything on top of the machine (water,
small metal or heavy objects, candles, lit cigarettes,
etc.).
► This could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not remove the plug by pulling on the cord; do not
handle the plug with wet hands.
► This could result in electric shock or fire. Safety information_ 4
Caution
During an electrical storm or for a period of
non-operation, remove the power plug from the
electrical outlet.
► This could result in electric shock or fire.
If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet, do not
attempt to force it in.
► Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet, or this
could result in electric shock.
Be careful, the paper output area is hot.
► Burns could occur.
Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC
interface cords.
► This could result in electric shock or fire and/or injury to your
pet.
If the machine has been dropped, or if the cabinet appears
damaged, unplug the machine from all interface connections
and request assistance from qualified service personnel.
► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
If the machine does not operate properly after these
instructions have been followed, unplug the machine from all
interface connections and request assistance from qualified
service personnel.
► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in
performance, unplug the machine from all interface
connections and request assistance from qualified service
personnel.
► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
OPERATING METHOD
Caution
Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing.
► It can cause damage to the machine.
When printing large quantities, the bottom part of the
paper output area may get hot. Do not allow children
to touch.
► Burns can occur.
Be careful not to put your hand between the machine
and paper tray.
► You may get injured.
When removing jammed paper, do not use tweezers
or sharp metal objects.
► It can damage the machine.
Do not block or push objects into the ventilation opening.
► This could result in elevated component temperatures which
can cause damage or fire.
Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output
tray.
► It can damage the machine.
Be care when replacing paper or removing jammed paper.
► New paper has sharp edges and can cause painful cuts.
This machine's power interception device is the power cord.
► To switch off the power supply, remove the power cord from
the electrical outlet.
If the machine gets overheated, it releases smoke,
makes strange noises, or generates an odd odor,
immediately turn off the power switch and unplug the
machine.
► This could result in electric shock or fire. Safety information_ 5
INSTALLATION / MOVING
Warning
Do not place the machine in an area with dust,
humidity or water leaks.
► This could result in electric shock or fire.
Caution
Before moving the machine, turn the power off and
disconnect all cords.
Then lift the machine:
•If the machine weighs under 20 kg (44.09lb), lift with
1 person.
• If the machine weighs 20 kg (44.09lb) - 40kg
(88.18lb), lift with 2 people.
• If the machine weighs more than 40 kg (88.18lb), lift
with 4 or more people.
► The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage.
Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight
location, such as a closet.
► If the machine is not well-ventilated, this could result in fire.
Do not place the machine on an unstable surface.
► The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage.
Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical
outlet.
► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
The machine should be connected to
the power level which is specified on the label.
► If you are unsure and want to check the power level you are
using, contact the electrical utility company.
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords.
► This can diminish performance, and could result in electric
shock or fire.
Use only No.26 AWGa
a. AWG: American Wire Gauge
or larger, telephone line cord, if
necessary.
► Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine.
Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe
operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters
(6 feet) with a 140V machine, then the gauge should be 16
AWG or larger.
► Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine, and could
result in electric shock or fire.
MAINTENANCE / CHECKING
Caution
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before
cleaning the inside of the machine. Do not clean the
machine with benzene, paint thinner or alcohol; do
not spray water directly into the machine.
► This could result in electric shock or fire.
Keep cleaning supplies away from children.
► Children could get hurt.Safety information_ 6
SUPPLY USAGE
Caution
Do not disassemble the toner cartridge.
► Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or
ingested.
When storing supplies such as toner cartridges, keep
them away from children.
► Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or
ingested.
Do not burn any of the supplies such as toner
cartridge or fuser unit.
► This could cause an explosion or uncontrollable
fire.
Using recycled supplies, such as toner, can cause damage to
the machine.
► In case of damage due to the use of recycled supplies, a
service fee will be charged.
When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper,
be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes.
► Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.
When toner gets on your clothing, do not use hot water to wash
it.
► Hot water sets toner into fabric. Use cold water.
When you are working inside the machine replacing
supplies or cleaning the inside, do not operate the
machine.
► You could get injured.
Do not disassemble, repair or rebuild the machine by
yourself.
► It can damage the machine. Call a certified
technician when the machine needs repair.
Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean
from dust or water.
► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
To clean and operate the machine, strictly follow the user's
guide provided with the machine.
► Otherwise, you could damage the machine.
Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with
screws.
► The machine should only be repaired by a Samsung service
technician.
Fuser units should only be repaired by a certified service
technician.
► Repair by non-certified technicians could result in fire or
electric shock. Regulatory information_ 7
regulatory information
This machine is designed for a normal work environment and certified with several regulatory statements.
LASER SAFETY STATEMENT
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I(1) laser products, and
elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1:1993 + A1:1997 + A2:2001.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to
laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or prescribed service condition.
• Wavelength: 800 nm
• Beam divergence
- Paraller: 13 degrees
- Perpendicular: 35 degrees
• Maximum power or energy output: 12 mW
WARNING
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from Laser/Scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible,
can damage your eyes.
When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons:
OZONE SAFETY
During normal operation, this machine produces ozone. The ozone produced does not present a hazard to the operator. However, it is
advisable that the machine be operated in a well ventilated area.
If you need additional information about ozone, contact your local Samsung dealer.Regulatory information_ 8
POWER SAVE
This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use.
When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of time, power consumption is automatically lowered.
ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks.
For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http://www.energystar.gov.
RECYCLING
Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an environmentally responsible manner.
CHINA ONLY
CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (WASTE ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT)
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems)
This marking shown on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset,
USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household wastes at the end of its working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment
or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, separate this from other types of wastes and recycle it responsibly to promote the
sustainable reuse of material resources.
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and
how they can take this item for environmentally safe recycling.
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product should not be mixed
with other commercial wastes for disposal.
RADIO FREQUENCY EMISSIONS
FCC Information to the User
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference, and
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to
try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:Regulatory information_ 9
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help.
Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
Canadian Radio Interference Regulations
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing
equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry and Science Canada.
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans la
norme sur le matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et Sciences Canada.
UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be
present (embedded) in your printer system. This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label to verify the
presence of wireless devices.
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system
label.
The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm (8 inches) separation between the device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the
body (this does not include extremities). This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the body when wireless devices are on.
The power output of the wireless device (or devices), which may be embedded in your printer, is well below the RF exposure limits as set by
the FCC.
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to
use it. Contact manufacturer for service.
FCC Statement for Wireless LAN use:
While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna combination the radio frequency exposure limit of 1m W/cm2 may be
exceeded at distances close to the antenna installed. Therefore, the user must maintain a minimum distance of 20cm from the antenna at
all times. This device cannot be colocated with another transmitter and transmitting antenna.
TURKEY ONLY
GERMANY ONLYRegulatory information_ 10
RUSSIA ONLY
REPLACING THE FITTED PLUG (FOR UK ONLY)
Important
The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the
fuse, you must re-fit the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover. If you have lost the fuse cover, do not use the plug until
you have another fuse cover.
Contact the people from you purchased the machine.
The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be suitable. However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have normal
13 amp plug sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove the moulded plug.
If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away.
You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket.
Important warning:
You must earth this machine.
The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:
• Green and Yellow: Earth
• Blue: Neutral
• Brown: Live
If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do the following:
You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter “E” or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or
green.
You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N” or colored black.
You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L” or colored red.
You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board.
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY (EUROPEAN COUNTRIES)
Approvals and Certifications
The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Declaration of Conformity with the following applicable
93/68/EEC Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated:
SCX-3200 Series: Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC), EMC Directive (2004/108/EC)
SCX-3205W(K): R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC)
The declaration of conformity may be consulted at www.samsung.com/printer, go to Support > Download center and enter your printer (MFP)
name to browse the EuDoC.
January 1, 1995: Council Directive 2006/95/EC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment.
January 1, 1996: Council Directive 2004/108/EC (92/31/EEC), approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic
compatibility.
March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of
their conformity. A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics
Co., Ltd. representative.Regulatory information_ 11
EC Certification
Certification to 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive (FAX)
This Samsung product has been self-certified by Samsung for pan-European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched
telephone network (PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and
compatible PBXs of the European countries:
In the event of problems, you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. in the first instance.
The product has been tested against TBR21. To assist in the use and application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard, the
European Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an advisory document (EG 201 121) which contains notes and additional
requirements to ensure network compatibility of TBR21 terminals. The product has been designed against, and is fully compliant with, all of the
relevant advisory notes contained in this document.
European Radio Approval Information (for products fitted with EU-approved radio devices)
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz band, may be
present (embedded) in your printer system which is intended for home or office use. This section is only applicable if these devices are present.
Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices.
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the European Union or associated areas if a CE mark
with a Notified Body Registration Number and the Alert Symbol is on the system label.
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in you printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the
European Commission through the R&TTE directive.
European States qualified under wireless approvals:
EU
Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France (with frequency restrictions), Germany, Greece, Hungary,
Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, The Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden and the U.K.
EEA/EFTA countries
Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway and Switzerland
European States with restrictions on use:
EU
In France, the frequency range is restricted to 2446.5-2483.5 MHz for devices above 10 mW transmitting power such as wireless
EEA/EFTA countries
No limitations at this time
REGULATORY COMPLIANCE STATEMENTS
Wireless Guidance
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be
present (embedded) in your printer system. The following section is a general overview of considerations while operating a wireless device.
Additional limitations, cautions, and concerns for specific countries are listed in the specific country sections (or country group sections). The
wireless devices in your system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio Approval Marks on the system rating label. If
the country you will be using the wireless device in, is not listed, contact your local Radio Approval agency for requirements. Wireless devices
are closely regulated and use may not be allowed.
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this
time. Because the wireless devices (which may be embedded into your printer) emit less energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use. Regardless of the power levels, care should be taken
to minimize human contact during normal operation.
As a general guideline, a separation of 20 cm (8 inches) between the wireless device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body
(this does not include extremities) is typical. This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the body when wireless devices are
on and transmitting.
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices. Examples of common restrictions are listed below:
Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with equipment on commercial aircraft. Current aviation regulations require wireless
devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane. IEEE 802.11 (also known as wireless Ethernet) and Bluetooth communication devices
are examples of devices that provide wireless communication.Regulatory information_ 12
OPENSSL LICENSE
Copyright (c) 1998-2001 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes
software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)".
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
Prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)".
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
ORIGINAL SSLEAY LICENSE
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with
Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to. The following conditions apply to
all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this
distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young's,
and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given
attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation
(online or textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or services is harmful or perceived as harmful, the option to use a wireless
device may be restricted or eliminated. Airports, Hospitals, and Oxygen or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples where use
of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated. When in environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless devices,
ask the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or turning on the wireless device.
Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices. Since your system is equipped with a wireless device, when traveling
between countries with your system, check with the local Radio Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on the use of
a wireless device in the destination country.
If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless device, do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields are
in place and the system is fully assembled.
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it.
Contact manufacturer for service.
Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be used. See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit, or contact
manufacturer Technical Support for additional information.Regulatory information_ 13
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes
cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library
being used are not cryptographic related.
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an
acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)".
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply
be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.Regulatory information_ 14
CHINA ONLYAbout this user’s guide_ 15
about this user’s guide
This user’s guide provides information about basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed explanation on each
step during actual usage. It is a valuable resource for both novice and professional users for the proper installation and
use of the machine.
• Read the safety information before using the machine.
• If you have a problem using the machine, refer to the troubleshooting chapter (See "Troubleshooting" on page 77).
• Terms used in this user’s guide are explained in the glossary chapter (See "Glossary" on page 96).
• Illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models.
• The procedures in this user’s guide are mainly based on Windows XP.
CONVENTION
Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:
• Document is synonymous with original.
• Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.
• Machine refers to printer or MFP.
The following table offers the conventions of this guide:
CONVENTION DESCRIPTION EXAMPLE
Bold For texts on the display or button names on the machine. Power
Note Provides additional information or details for the machine function and feature. The date format may differ from country
to country.
Caution Contains information you can use to protect the machine from possible
mechanical damage or malfunction.
Do not touch the surface of the drum
located in the toner cartridge or imaging
unit.
Footnote Provides additional information on certain words or a phrases. a. pages per minute
(“Cross-reference”) Refers you to additional detailed information. (See "Finding more information" on
page 16).About this user’s guide_ 16
FINDING MORE INFORMATION
You can find information about setting up and using your machine in the following resources, either as a print-out or on screen.
MATERIAL NAME DESCRIPTION
Quick Installation
Guide
This guide provides information on setting up your machine. This guide is provided in the box with the printer.
User’s Guide This guide provides you with step-by-step instructions for using your machine’s full features, maintaining your machine,
troubleshooting, and replacing supplies.
Machine Driver Help This help provides you with information about the printer driver and instructions for setting up the options for printing (See "Using help"
on page 56).
Samsung website If you have Internet access, you can get help, support, machine drivers, manuals, and order information from the Samsung website,
www.samsung.com/printer.
Downloadable
software
You can download useful software programs from the Samsung website.
• Samsung AnyWeb Print: helps personal users to screen-capture the website screen in Windows Internet Explorer easily.
(http://solution.samsungprinter.com/personal/anywebprint)
• SyncThru™ Web Admin Service: provides convenient tools for network administrators who need to manage many machines
simultaneously. This program is for network model only. (http://solution.samsungprinter.com, See "Features by Models" on
page 18)Features of your new product_ 17
features of your new product
Your new machine is equipped with a number of special features that improve the quality of the documents you print.
SPECIAL FEATURES
Print with excellent quality and speed
• You can print with a resolution of up to 1200 x 1200 dpi
effective output.
• Your machine prints A4-sized paper at up to 16 ppm and
letter-sized paper at up to 17 ppm.
Handle many different types of printable material
• The 150-sheet tray supports plain paper in various sizes,
letterhead, envelopes, labels, custom-sized media,
postcards, and heavy paper.
Create professional documents
• Print Watermarks. You can customize your documents with
words, such as “Confidential” (See "Using watermarks" on
page 57).
• Print Posters. The text and pictures of each page of your
document are magnified and printed across the sheet of
paper and can then be taped together to form a poster (See
"Printing posters" on page 56).
• You can use preprinted forms and letterhead with plain
paper (See "Using overlays" on page 58).
Save time and money
• To save paper, you can print multiple pages on one single
sheet of paper (See "Printing multiple pages on one sheet of
paper" on page 56).
• This machine automatically conserves electricity by
substantially reducing power consumption when not in use.
• To save paper, you can print on both sides of the paper
manually (See "Printing on both sides of the paper (Manual)"
on page 56).
Print in various environments
• You can print with various operating systems such as
Windows, Linux, and Macintosh OS systems.
• Your machine is equipped with a Hi-Speed USB 2.0
interface.
• Your machine comes with a built-in network interface,
Ethernet 10/100 BaseTX. SCX-3205W(K) only)
• Your machine comes with a built-in network interface 802.11
b/g/n wireless LAN. (SCX-3205W(K) only) For some
counties, only 802.11 b/g can be applied.
Copy the original in high quality
• You can copy the original and print them in enhanced image
quality and size.
Scan the originals
• Scan in color and use the precise compressions of BMP,
JPEG, TIFF and PDF formats.
• Use one button to scan your original to the connected
computer.
Eco Print
• You can reduce toner and paper usage (See "Eco Print
button" on page 22).
IPv6 (SCX-3205W(K) only)
• The machine supports IPv6 (See "IPv6 Configuration" on
page 34).
AirPrint
AirPrint allows you to wirelessly print directly from iPhone, iPad
and iPod touch running iOS 4.2 or later.Features of your new product_ 18
FEATURES BY MODELS
The machine is designed to support all of your document needs from printing to more advanced networking solutions for your business.
Features by models include:
FEATURES SCX-3200 SERIES SCX-3205W(K) SERIES
Print ● ●
Eco Print ● ●
Duplex (2-sided) printing (manual) ● ●
Copy ● ●
Scan ● ●
Hi-Speed USB 2.0 ● ●
Print Screen ●
IPv6 ●
Network Interface Ethernet 10/100 Base TX wired LAN ●
Network Interface 802.11b/g/n wireless LANa
a.Depending on your country, wireless LAN card may not be available. For some counties, only 802.11 b/g can be
applied. Contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you bought your machine.
●
SyncThru™ Web Service ●
(●: Included, Blank: Not included) Introduction_ 19
1.introduction
This chapter gives you an overview of your machine:
This chapter includes:
• Machine overview
• Control panel overview
• Understanding the status LED
• Introducing the useful buttons
MACHINE OVERVIEW
Front view
3
6
1
10
11
12
9
7
8
5
4
2
13
14
This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model.
1
Scanner lid 6
Front door 11 Inner cover
2
Scanner glass 7
Tray 12 Toner cartridge
3
Control panel 8
Paper length guide 13 Toner cartridge handle
4
Output tray (face down) 9
Paper width guide 14 Toner cartridge drum
5
Output support 10 Scan unitIntroduction_ 20
Rear view
1 2 3
This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model.
1
USB port
2
Power cord receptacle
3 Network porta
a.SCX-3205W(K) onlyIntroduction_ 21
CONTROL PANEL OVERVIEW
This control panel may differ from your machine depending on its model.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
13 12
1 Power ( )
Allows you to turn the power on or off (See "Power button" on page 23).
2
Eco Print Turn the Eco mode on or off (See "Eco Print button" on page 22).
3
Scan to Sends scanned data (See "Scanning originals and sending to your computer (Scan to PC)" on page 64).
4 ID Copy Allows you to copy both sides the ID card like a driver’s license to a single side of paper (See "ID card copying" on page 63).
5
Front LED When the LED lights on, place the front side of an ID card facing down on the scanner glass (See "ID card copying" on
page 63).
6
Back LED When the LED lights on, place the back side of an ID card facing down on the scanner glass (See "ID card copying" on
page 63).
7
Display Shows the number of pages you want to copy.
8
+/- Buttons Allows you to increase/decrease the number of page you want to copy (See "+/- buttons" on page 22).
9
Print Screen (SCX-3200
only) Prints the displayed screen of your monitor (See "Print Screen button (SCX-3200 only)" on page 22).
WPS (SCX-3205W(K)
only) Allows you to turn on or off the wireless network connection (See "WPS button (SCX-3205W(K))" on page 22).
10 Stop/Clear ( )
Stops an operation at any time and there are more functions (See "Stop/Clear button" on page 23).
11 Start ( )
Begins a printing, copying or scanning job depending on which function you are using.
12
Wireless LED
(SCX-3205W(K) only) Shows the current status of the wireless network connection (See "Understanding the status LED" on page 22).
13 Status LED Shows the status of your machine (See "Understanding the status LED" on page 22).Introduction_ 22
UNDERSTANDING THE STATUS LED
Status LED
The color of the LED indicates the machine's current status.
STATUS LED DESCRIPTION
Off • The machine is off-line.
• The machine is in sleep mode.
Green On • The machine is in ready mode or warming up.
Blinking • When the LED blinks slowly, the machine is
receiving data from the computer or printing
documents.
• When the LED blinks rapidly, the machine is
operating special functions.
Red On • The inner cover is opened. Close the inner
cover completely.
• There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the
tray.
• The machine has stopped due to a major error.
• Your system has some problems. If this
problem occurs, contact a service
representative.
• A toner cartridge has almost reached its
estimated cartridge lifea
a.Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner
cartridge life, which indicates the average capacity of print-outs and is
designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19752. The number of pages may be
affected by operating environment, percentage of image area, printing
interval, media type, and media size. Some amount of toner may
remain in the cartridge even when red LED is on and the printer stops
printing.
. It is recommended to
replace the toner cartridge (See "Replacing the
toner cartridge" on page 89).
Blinking • A small amount of toner is left in the cartridge.
The estimated cartridge lifea
of toner is close.
Prepare a new cartridge for replacement. You
may temporarily increase the printing quality by
redistributing the toner (See "Redistributing
toner" on page 77).
• The machine is printing in manual feed mode or
in manual duplex mode.
Orange On A paper jam has occurred (See "Clearing paper
jams" on page 78).
Samsung does not recommend using a non-genuine Samsung toner
cartridge such as one that is refilled or remanufactured. Samsung
cannot guarantee a non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge's quality.
Service or repair required as a result of using non-genuine Samsung
toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty.
All printing errors will appear in the Smart Panel program window. If
the problem persists, contact a service representative.
Wireless LED (SCX-3205W(K) only)
WIRELESS LED STATUS DESCRIPTION
Blue Off ( )
Wireless network is disconnected.
On ( ) Wireless network is connected.
Slowly blinks
( )
The machine starts connecting to a
wireless network.
Fast blinks
( )
• The machine is connecting to
access point (or wireless router).
• Wireless network connection is
being disconnected.
INTRODUCING THE USEFUL BUTTONS
Print Screen button (SCX-3200 only)
If you press Print Screen button for less than two seconds, the green light
blinks fast on the Status LED, and then the machine prints the whole
screen displayed in the monitor.
If you press Print Screen button for more than two seconds, the Status
LED lights on green, and then the machine prints an active screen
displayed in the monitor.
• The page will be printed on the default page like A4 or Letter.
• Print Screen can only be used in the Windows and Macintosh
operating systems.
• You can only use this function with a USB-connected machine.
• You can use this function only when the Smart Panel program is
installed and running.
• You can only use this function in Eco Print mode off.
Eco Print button
You can turn the Eco Print mode on or off by simply pressing the button. If
you set the Eco Print mode on, the machine automatically sets the 2-UP
and Toner Save option on and print with those options.
1. Press Eco Print button on the control panel.
2. Eco Print LED lights on. Then, Eco Print mode is on.
To turn off Eco Print mode, press Eco Print button one more time.
+/- buttons
You can determine the number of copies (up to 99 copies) you want to copy
by pressing +/- buttons. The default setting value is 1.
• If you press +/- buttons briefly, the number of copies
increases/decreases by single digits.
• If you press +/- buttons long, the number of copies increases/decreases
by ten-fold.
WPS button (SCX-3205W(K))
This feature automatically detects which WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup™)
mode your access point uses. By pushing a button on the wireless LAN
router/access point and the machine, you can setup the wireless network
and security settings (See "Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))" on
page 36).Introduction_ 23
Stop/Clear button
By pressing Stop/Clear button, you can do the following functions.
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
Printing a configuration
report
In ready mode, press and hold this button
long enough (about two seconds) until the
Status LED blinks slowly, and release the
button (See "To print a configuration report"
on page 24).
Printing a network
configuration report
(SCX-3205W(K) only)
In ready mode, press and hold this button for
four seconds until the Status LED blinks fast,
and release the button (See "Printing a
network configuration report" on page 30).
Supplies information
report
In the ready mode, press and hold this button
for about 6 seconds until the Status LED is
on, and release (See "To print a supplies
information report" on page 24).
Canceling print job Press Stop/Clear button during a
operation. The print job is cleared from both
the machine and the computer and then the
machine returns to ready mode. This may
take some time depending on the size of the
print job.
Power button
By pressing Power button, you can turn the machine on or off.
Turning on the machine
1. Plug in the power cord.
2. Press Power button on the control panel.
When the machine is powered on, you can see LED looping on the
display. Then, the machine is in ready mode.
If you want to turn the power off, press and hold this button for
about two seconds.Getting started_ 24
2.getting started
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the USB connected machine and software.
This chapter includes:
• Setting up the hardware
• Printing a report
• Supplied software
• System requirements
• Installing USB connected machine’s driver
• Sharing your machine locally
SETTING UP THE HARDWARE
This section shows the steps to set up the hardware, as is explained in the
Quick Installation Guide. Make sure you read the Quick Installation Guide
first and follow the steps below:
Location
1. Select a stable location.
Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation. Allow
extra space for opening cover(s) and tray(s).
The area should be well ventilated and away from direct sunlight or
sources of heat, cold, and humidity. Do not set the machine close to the
edge of your desk or table.
Printing is suitable for altitudes under 1,000 m (3,281 ft). Refer to the
altitude setting to optimize your printing (See "Altitude adjustment" on
page 46).
Place the machine on a flat, stable surface so that there is no incline
greater than 2 mm (0.08 inch). Otherwise, printing quality may be
affected.
2mm
(0.08 in)
2mm
(0.08 in)
2. Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items.
3. Remove tape holding the machine securely.
4. Install the toner cartridge.
5. Load paper (See "Loading originals" on page 48).
6. Make sure that all cables are connected to the machine.
7. Turn the machine on (See "Turning on the machine" on page 23).
This machine will not operate when the power main fails.
PRINTING A REPORT
Print a configuration or supplies information page to make sure that the
machine is operating properly.
To print a configuration report
In the ready mode, press and hold Stop/Clear button on the control
panel for long enough (about two seconds) until the Status LED blinks
slowly, and release.
For SCX-3205W(K), you can print a network configuration report (See
"Printing a network configuration report" on page 30).
To print a supplies information report
In the ready mode, press and hold Stop/Clear button on the control
panel for about six seconds until the Status LED lights on, and release.
SUPPLIED SOFTWARE
After you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer, you
must install the printer software. If you are a Windows or Macintosh OS
user, install the software from the supplied CD and if you are a Linux OS
user, download the software from the Samsung website
(www.samsung.com/printer) and install.
Machine software is occasionally updated for reasons like the release
of new operating system and etc. If needed, download the latest
version from the Samsung website (www.samsung.com/printer).OS CONTENTS
Windows • Printer driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of
your machine’s features.
• Scanner driver: TWAIN and Windows Image
Acquisition (WIA) drivers are available for scanning
documents on your machine.
• Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the
machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs
during printing (See "Using the Smart Panel program" on
page 70).
• SmarThrua
:
a.Allows you to edit a scanned image in various ways using a powerful
image editor and to send the image by email. You can also open
another image editor program such as Adobe Photoshop, from
SmarThru. For details, refer to the on-screen help supplied on the
SmarThru program (See "SmarThru" on page 70).
This program is the accompanying
Windows-based software for your multifunctional
machine.
• Samsung Scan and Fax Manager: You can find out
about Samsung Scan and Fax Manager program
information and installed scan driver's condition.
• Printer Settings Utility: This program allows you to set
up printer’s other options from your computer.
• SetIP: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP
addresses. (SCX-3205W(K) only)
Macintosh • Printer Driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of
your machine’s features.
• Scanner driver: TWAIN driver is available for scanning
documents on your machine.
• Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the
machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs
during printing (See "Using the Smart Panel program" on
page 70).
• Samsung Scan and Fax Manager: You can find out
about Samsung Scan and Fax Manager program
information and installed scan driver's condition.
• Printer Settings Utility: This program allows you to set
up printer’s other options from your computer.
• SetIP: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP
addresses. (SCX-3205W(K) only)
Linux • Unified Linux Driver: Use this driver to take full
advantage of your machine’s features.
• SANE: Use this driver to scan documents.
• Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the
machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs
during printing (See "Using the Smart Panel program" on
page 70).
• Printer Settings Utility: This program allows you to set
up printer’s other options from your computer.
• SetIP: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP
addresses. (SCX-3205W(K) only)
Getting started_ 25
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the following
requirements:
Windows
Your machine supports the following Windows operating systems.
OPERATING
SYSTEM
REQUIREMENT (RECOMMENDED)
CPU RAM
FREE
HDD
SPACE
Windows®
2000
Intel® Pentium® II 400
MHz (Pentium III 933
MHz)
64 MB
(128 MB)
600 MB
Windows® XP Intel® Pentium® III 933
MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz)
128 MB
(256 MB)
1.5 GB
Windows
Server® 2003
Intel® Pentium® III 933
MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz)
128 MB
(512 MB)
1.25 GB to
2 GB
Windows
Server® 2008
Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz
(Pentium IV 2 GHz)
512 MB
(2 GB)
10 GB
Windows
Vista®
Intel® Pentium® IV 3 GHz 512 MB
(1 GB)
15 GB
Windows® 7 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz
32-bit or 64-bit processor
or higher
1 GB
(2 GB)
16 GB
• Support for DirectX® 9 graphics with 128 MB
memory (to enable the Aero theme).
• DVD-R/W Drive
Windows
Server® 2008
R2
Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz
(x86) or 1.4 GHz (x64)
processors (2 GHz or
faster)
512 MB
(2 GB)
10 GB
• Internet Explorer® 5.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all
Windows operating systems.
• Windows Terminal Services is compatible with your machine.
Macintosh
OPERATING
SYSTEM
REQUIREMENTS (RECOMMENDED)
CPU RAM
FREE
HDD
SPACE
Mac OS X
10.3 ~ 10.4
• Intel®
Processors
• PowerPC G4/ G5
• 128 MB for a
PowerPC based
Mac (512 MB)
• 512 MB for a
Intel-based Mac
(1 GB)
1 GBGetting started_ 26
Linux
ITEM REQUIREMENTS
Operating
system
RedHat® Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64 bit)
Fedora 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 (32/64 bit)
SuSE Linux 10.0, 10.1 (32 bit)
OpenSuSE® 10.2, 10.3, 11.0, 11.1, 11.2 (32.64 bit)
Mandriva 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2009.1
(32/64 bit)
Ubuntu 5.04, 5.10, 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04, 8.10,
9.04, 9.10 (32/64 bit)
SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11 (32/64 bit)
Debian 4.0, 5.0 (32/64 bit)
CPU Pentium IV 2.4 GHz (Intel Core™2)
RAM 512 MB (1 GB)
Free HDD space 1 GB (2 GB)
INSTALLING USB CONNECTED MACHINE’S
DRIVER
A locally connected machine is a machine directly connected to your
computer by a USB cable.
Only use a USB cable no longer than 3 m (10 ft.).
Windows
You can install the machine software using the typical or custom method.
The following steps are recommended for most users who use a machine
directly connected to your computer. All components necessary for machine
operations will be installed.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to the computer and powered
on.
If the “Found New Hardware Wizard” window appears during the
installation procedure, click Cancel to close the window.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
• The software CD should automatically run and an installation window
will appear.
• If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run.
Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents
your CD-ROM Drive. Click OK.
• If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 or Windows 2008 Server R2
click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run.
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents
your CD-ROM Drive and click OK.
• If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7 or
Windows 2008 Server R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run
program field, and click Continue or Yes in the User Account
Control window.
3. Select Install now.
If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
• For SCX-3205W(K), you can access the Wireless Setting and
Installation menu. The menu allows you to install a wireless
network to connect to the machine with an USB cable (See
"Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))" on page 36).
• The Advanced Installation has two options, Custom
Installation and Install Software Only. The Custom
Installation allows you to select the machine’s connection and
choose individual component to install. The Install Software
Only allows you to install the supplied software, such as Smart
Panel. Follow the instruction on the window.
4. Read the License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the
License Agreement. Then, click Next.
The software searches for the machine.
If your machine is not connected to the computer, the following
Mac OS X
10.5
• Intel®
Processors
• 867 MHz or
faster Power PC
G4/ G5
512 MB (1 GB) 1 GB
Mac OS X
10.6
• Intel®
Processors
1 GB (2 GB) 1 GB
OPERATING
SYSTEM
REQUIREMENTS (RECOMMENDED)
CPU RAM
FREE
HDD
SPACEGetting started_ 27
window will appear.
• After connecting the machine, click Next.
• Check if you want to install the software without
connection of the printer.
- Check this option to install the software without a machine
connected. In this case, the print a test page window will be
skipped, and completes the installation.
• Search again
When you press this button, the firewall notice window
appears.
- Turn off the firewall and Search again. For Windows
operating system, click Start > Control Panel > Windows
Firewall, and inactivate this option.
- Turn off the firewall from the third party's program beside
the operating system. Refer to the manual provided by
individual programs.
• Direct Input
The Direct Input allows you to search a specific machine on
the network.
- Search by IP address: Enter the IP address or the host
name. Then click Next.
To verify your machine’s IP address, print a network
configuration report (See "Printing a network configuration
report" on page 30).
- Search by network path: To find a shared machine (UNC
Path), enter the shared name manually or find a shared
printer by clicking the Browse button. Then click Next.
• Help
- This help button gives you the detailed information about
how to connect the machine.
5. The searched machines will be shown on the screen. Select the one you
wish to use and click Next.
If the software searched only one machine, the confirmation
window appears.
6. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page
appears. If you want to print a test page, click Print a test page.
Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 8.
7. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.
If not, click No to reprint it.
8. If you want to register your machine on Samsung web site, click On-line
Registration.
If your machine is not connected yet to the network or computer,
click How to connect?. How to connect? gives detailed
information about how to connect the machine. Follow the
instructions in the window.
9. Click Finish.
If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to
repair or reinstall the driver.
a) Make sure that the machine is connected to your machine and
powered on.
b) From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs >
Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Uninstall.
c) Select the option you wish to execute, then follow the instruction
on the window.
Macintosh
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered
on.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.
4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon.
6. Enter the password and click OK.
7. The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.
8. Read the license agreement and click Continue.
9. Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
10.Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is recommended for
most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual components to
install.
11.When the message which warns that all applications will close on your
computer appears, click Continue.
12.Select Typical installation for a network printer for a network printer
and then click OK.
13.After the installation is finished, click Restart.
14.Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility.
• For Mac OS X 10.5 ~ 10.6, open the Applications folder > System
Preferences and click Print & Fax.
15.Click Add on the Printer List.
• For Mac OS X 10.5 ~ 10.6, click the “+” icon; a display window will
pop up.
16.For Mac OS X 10.3, select the USB tab.
• For Mac OS X10.4, click Default Browser and find the USB
connection.
• For Mac OS X 10.5 ~ 10.6, click Default and find the USB
connection.
17.For Mac OS X 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select
Samsung in Printer Model and your machine name in Model Name.
• For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select
Samsung in Print Using and your machine name in Model.
• For Mac OS X 10.5 ~ 10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly,
select Select a driver to use... and your machine name in Print
Using.
Your machine appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default
machine.
18.Click Add.Getting started_ 28
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and
reinstall it.
Follow steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh.
a) Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
b) Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
c) Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh
desktop.
d) Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
e) Double-click the Installer OS X icon.
f) Enter the password and click OK.
g) The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.
h) Read the license agreement and click Continue.
i) Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
j) Select Uninstall and click Uninstall.
k) When the message which warns that all applications will close on
your computer appears, Click Continue.
l) When the uninstall is done, click Quit.
Linux
You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website
to install the printer software.
Follow the steps below to install the software.
Installing the Unified Linux Driver
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2. When the Administrator Login window appears, type in root in the
Login field and enter the system password.
You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine
software. If you are not a super user, ask your system
administrator.
3. From the Samsung website, download the Unified Linux Driver
package to your computer.
4. Right-click the Unified Linux Driver package and extract the
package.
5. Double-click cdroot > autorun.
6. When the welcome screen appears, click Next.
7. When the installation is complete, click Finish.
The installation program added the Unified Driver Configurator desktop
icon and the Unified Driver group to the system menu for your
convenience. If you have any difficulties, consult the on screen help that
is available through your system menu or from the driver package
Windows applications, such as Unified Driver Configurator.
Installing the Smart Panel
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2. When the Administrator Login window appears, type in root in the
Login field and enter the system password.
You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine
software. If you are not a super user, ask your system
administrator.
3. From the Samsung website, download the Smart Panel package to
your computer.
4. Right-click the Smart Panel package and extract the package.
5. Double-click cdroot > Linux > smartpanel > install.sh.
Installing the Printer Settings Utility
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2. When the Administrator Login window appears, type in root in the
Login field and enter the system password.
You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine
software. If you are not a super user, ask your system
administrator.
3. From the Samsung website, download the Printer Settings Utility
package to your computer.
4. Right-click the Printer Settings Utility package and extract the
package.
5. Double-click cdroot > Linux > psu > install.sh.
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and
reinstall it.
Follow the steps below steps to uninstall the driver for Linux.
a) Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
b) When the Administrator Login window appears, type in “root”
in the Login field and enter the system password.
You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the printer
driver. If you are not a super user, ask your system
administrator.
c) Click the icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal
screen appears, type in:
[root@localhost root]#cd /opt/Samsung/mfp/uninstall/
[root@localhost uninstall]#./uninstall.sh
d) Click Uninstall.
e) Click Next.
f) Click Finish.Getting started_ 29
SHARING YOUR MACHINE LOCALLY
Follow the steps below to set up computers to share your machine locally.
If the Host computer is directly connected to the machine by a USB cable
and is also connected to the local network environment, the client computer
connected to the local network can use the shared machine through the
host computer to print.
2
1
1
Host computer A computer which is directly connected to
the machine by USB cable.
2
Client computers Computers which use the machine shared
through the host computer.
Windows
Setting up a host computer
1. Install your printer driver (See "Installing USB connected machine’s
driver" on page 26).
2. Click the Windows Start menu.
3. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.
• For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes.
• For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel >
Hardware and Sound > Printers.
• For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers.
• For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware
> Devices and Printers.
4. Right-click the printer icon.
5. For Windows XP/Vista/Server 2003/Server 2008, press Properties.
For Windows 7/Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus,
select the Printer properties.
If Printer properties item has a ► mark, you can select other
printer drivers connected with the selected printer.
6. Select the Sharing tab.
If you are a Windows 7/Windows Server 2008 R2 user, check
the Change Sharing Options.
7. Check the Share this printer checkbox.
8. Fill in the Share Name field. Click OK.
Setting up a client computer
1. Install your printer driver (See "Installing USB connected machine’s
driver" on page 26).
2. Click the Windows Start menu.
3. Select All programs > Accessories > Windows Explorer.
4. Enter the IP address of the host computer in the address bar and
press Enter in your keyboard.
In case host computer requires a User name and Password,
fill in User ID and password of the host computer account.
5. Right-click the printer icon you want to share and select Connect.
6. If a set up complete message appears, click OK.
7. Open the file you want to print and start printing.
Macintosh
The following steps are for Mac OS X 10.5~10.6. Refer to Mac Help
for other OS versions.
Setting up a host computer
1. Install your printer driver (See "Macintosh" on page 27).
2. Open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click
Print & Fax.
3. Select the printer to share in the Printers list.
4. Select Share this printer.
Setting up a client computer
1. Install your printer driver (See "Macintosh" on page 27).
2. Open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click
Print & Fax.
3. Click the “+” icon.
A display window showing the name of your shared printer appears.
4. Select your machine and click Add. Network setup (SCX-3205W(K) only)_ 30
3.network setup (scx-3205w(k) only)
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the network connected machine and software.
This chapter includes:
• Network environment
• Introducing useful network programs
• Using a wired network
• Installing network connected machine’s driver
• IPv6 Configuration
NETWORK ENVIRONMENT
You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your
network machine. You can set up the basic network settings through the
network setting programs.
The following table shows the network environments supported by the
machine.
ITEM REQUIREMENTS
Network interface • Ethernet 10/100 Base-TX
• 802.11b/g/n Wireless LANa
a.Depending on your country, wireless LAN card may not be available.
For some counties, only 802.11 b/g can be applied. Contact your local
Samsung dealer or the retailer where you bought your machine.
Network operating system • Windows 2000/Server 2003 /Server
2008/XP/Vista/7/Server 2008 R2
• Various Linux OS
• Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.6
Network protocols • TCP/IPv4
• DHCP, BOOTP
• DNS, WINS, Bonjour, SLP, UPnP
• Standard TCP/IP Printing (RAW), LPR,
IPP
• SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP
• TCP/IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, RAW, LPR,
SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP)
(See "IPv6 Configuration" on page 34.)
Wireless security • Authentication: Open System, Shared
Key, WPA Personal, WPA2 Personal
(PSK)
• Encryption: WEP64, WEP128, TKIP,
AES
INTRODUCING USEFUL NETWORK PROGRAMS
There are several programs available to setup the network settings easily in
network environment. For the network administrator especially, managing
several machines on the network is possible.
Before using the programs below, set the IP address first.
SyncThru™ Web Service
Web server embedded on your network machine, which allows you to do
the following tasks.
• You can configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to
connect to various network environments.
• You can customize machine settings
(See "Using SyncThru™ Web Service (SCX-3205W(K) only)" on
page 69).
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service
Web-based machine management solution for network administrator.
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of
managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and troubleshoot
network machines from any site with corporate internet access.
• Download this program from http://solution.samsungprinter.com.
SetIP
This utility program allows you to select a network interface and manually
configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP protocol.
• See "IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Windows)" on page 31.
• See "IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Macintosh)" on page 31.
• See "IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Linux)" on page 32.
TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program.
USING A WIRED NETWORK
You must set up the network protocols on your machine to use it on your
network. This chapter will show you how this is easily accomplished.
You can use network after connecting network cable to a corresponding
port on your machine.
Printing a network configuration report
You can print a network configuration report from the machine’s control
panel that will show the current machine’s network settings. This will help
you to set up a network and troubleshoot problems.Network setup (SCX-3205W(K) only)_ 31
1. Press and hold Stop/Clear button on the control panel for long
enough (about four seconds) until the Status LED blinks fast.
2. Then, release the button.
Using this Network Configuration Report, you can find your machine MAC
address and IP address.
For example:
• MAC Address:00:15:99:41:A2:78
• IP Address:192.0.0.192
Setting IP address
First, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and
managements. In most cases a new IP address will be automatically
assigned by a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server located
on the network.
In a few situations the IP address must be set manually. This is called a
static IP and is often required in corporate Intranets for security reasons.
• DHCP IP assignment: Connect your machine to the network, and wait a
few minutes for the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the
machine. Then, print the Network Configuration Report as explained
above. If the report shows that the IP address has changed, the
assignment was successful. You will see the new IP address in the
report.
• Static IP assignment: Use SetIP program to change the IP address
from your computer. If your machine has a control panel, you can also
change IP address using the machine's control panel.
In an office environment, we recommend that you contact a network
administrator to set IP address for you.
IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Windows)
This program is for manually setting the network IP address of your
machine using its MAC address to communicate with the machine. A
MAC address is the hardware serial number of the network interface and
can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
Before using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall by performing
the following steps.
1. Open Control Panel.
2. Double-click Security Center.
3. Click Windows Firewall.
4. Disable the firewall.
Installing the program
1. Insert the Printer Software CD-ROM provided with your machine.
When the driver CD runs automatically, close that window.
2. Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive (X represents your
CD-ROM drive).
3. Double-click Application > SetIP.
4. Double-click Setup.exe to install this program.
5. Select a language, then click Next.
6. Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation.
Starting the program
1. Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
2. Turn on the machine.
3. From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung
Printers > SetIP > SetIP.
4. Click on the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the
TCP/IP configuration window.
5. Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window
as follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this
information assigned by a network manager before proceeding.
• MAC Address: Find the machine’s MAC address from the
Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons.
For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8.
• IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your printer.
For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150,
enter 192.168.1.X (X is number between 1 and 254 other than
the computer’s address).
• Subnet Mask: Enter a Subnet Mask.
• Default Gateway: Enter a Default Gateway.
6. Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print
the Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are
correct.
7. Click Exit to close the SetIP program.
8. If necessary, restart the computer’s firewall.
IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Macintosh)
For using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing
by performing the following.
1. Open System Preferences.
2. Click Security.
3. Click the Firewall menu.
4. Turn firewall off.
The following instructions may vary from your model.
1. Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
2. Insert the Installation CD-ROM, and open the disk window, select
MAC_Installer > MAC_Printer > SetIP > SetIPapplet.html.
3. Double-click the file and Safari will automatically open, then select
Trust. The browser will open the SetIPapplet.html page that shows
the printer’s name and IP address information.
4. Click on the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the
TCP/IP configuration window.
5. Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window
as follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this
information assigned by a network manager before proceeding.
• MAC Address: Find the machine’s MAC address from the
Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons.
For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8.
• IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your printer.Network setup (SCX-3205W(K) only)_ 32
For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150,
enter 192.168.1.X (X is number between 1 and 254 other than
the computer’s address).
• Subnet Mask: Enter a Subnet Mask.
• Default Gateway: Enter a Default Gateway.
6. Select Apply, then OK, and OK again. The printer will automatically
print the configuration report. Confirm that all the settings are correct.
Quit Safari. You may close and eject the installation CD-ROM. If
necessary, restart the computer’s firewall. You have successfully
changed the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway.
IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Linux)
SetIP program should be automatically installed during the printer driver
installation.
1. Print the machine’s network configuration report to find your
machine’s MAC address.
2. Open the /opt/Samsung/mfp/share/utils/.
3. Double-click the SetIPApplet.html file.
4. Click to open the TCP/IP configuration window.
5. Enter the network card’s MAC address, IP address, subnet mask,
default gateway, and then click Apply.
When you enter the MAC address, enter it without a colon(:).
6. The machine prints the network information. Confirm all the settings
are correct.
7. Close the SetIP program.
Network parameter setting
You can also set up the various network settings through the network
administration programs such as SyncThru™ Web Admin Service and
SyncThru™ Web Service.
Restoring factory default settings
You may need to reset the machine to the factory default settings when
machine that you are using is connected to new network environment.
Restoring factory default settings using SyncThru™
Web Service
1. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari or Firefox and
enter your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
For example:
2. Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.
3. Click Login on the upper right of the website.
The Login window appears.
4. Type in the ID and Password, and then click Login.
If it is your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in
the below default ID and password.
• ID: admin
• Password: sec00000
5. Click Settings > Network Settings.
6. Click Restore Default on the left pane of the website.
7. Click Clear.
8. Click Yes when the confirmation window appears.
9. Click OK when the success window appears.
10.Turn off and restart machine to apply settings.
INSTALLING NETWORK CONNECTED
MACHINE’S DRIVER
Windows
You can set up the machine driver, follow the steps below.
This is recommended for most users. All components necessary for
machine operations will be installed.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to the network or USB and
powered on.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
• The software CD should automatically run and an installation window
appears.
• If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run.
Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents
your CD-ROM drive. Click OK.
• If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 or Windows 2008 Server R2
click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run.
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents
your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
• If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click Run
Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue in the
User Account Control windows.
• If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows 7 or Windows 2008
Server R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and
click Yes in the User Account Control windows.
3. Select Install Now.
If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
• For SCX-3205W(K), you can access Wireless Setting and
Installation menu. The Wireless Setting and Installation
allows you to install a wireless network to connect to the
machine with a USB cable (See "Setting a wireless network
with USB cable" on page 38).
• The Advanced Installation has two options, Custom
Installation and Install Software Only. The Custom
Installation allows you to select the machine’s connection and
choose individual component to install. The Install Software
Only allows you to install the supplied software such as the
Smart Panel. Follow the instruction on the window.
4. Read License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the
License Agreement. Then, click Next.
The program searches for the machine.
If your machine is not found in the network or locally, the error Network setup (SCX-3205W(K) only)_ 33
message appears.
• Check if you want to install the software without
connection of the printer.
- Check this option to install this program without a machine
connected. In this case, the print a test page window will be
skipped, and completes the installation.
• Search again
When you press this button, the firewall notice window
appears.
- Turn off the firewall and Search again. For Windows
operating system, click Start > Control Panel > Windows
Firewall, and inactivate this option.
- Turn off the firewall from the third party's program beside
the operating system. Refer to the manual provided by
individual programs.
• Direct Input
The Direct Input allows you to search a specific machine on
the network.
- Search by IP address: Enter the IP address or the host
name. Then click Next.
To verify your machine’s IP address, print a network
configuration report (See "Printing a network configuration
report" on page 30).
- Search by network path: To find a shared machine (UNC
Path), enter the shared name manually or find a shared
printer by clicking the Browse button. Then click Next.
• Help
If your machine is not connected to the computer or network,
this help button gives detailed information about the how to
connect the machine.
5. The searched machine will be shown on the screen. Select the one you
wish to use and click Next.
If the driver searched only one machine, the confirmation window
appears.
6. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page
appears. If you want to print a test page, click Print a test page.
Otherwise, just click Next and go to step 8.
7. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.
If not, click No to reprint it.
8. If you want to register your machine on Samsung website, click On-line
Registration.
If your machine is not connected yet to the network, click How to
connect?. How to connect? gives you the detailed information
about the how to connect the machine. Follow the instructions in
the window.
9. Click Finish.
• After the driver setup is completed, you may enable firewall.
• If your printer driver does not work properly, follow the step below
to repair or reinstall the driver.
a) Make sure that the machine is connected to your machine and
powered on.
b) From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs >
Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Uninstall.
c) Select the option as you wish, follow the instruction on the
window.
Macintosh
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.
4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon.
6. Enter the password and click OK.
7. The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.
8. Read the license agreement and click Continue.
9. Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
10.Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is recommended for
most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual components to
install.
11.When the message which warns that all applications will close on your
computer appears. Click Continue.
12.Select Typical installation for a network printer for a network printer
and then click OK.
13.The SetIP program automatically runs. If the machine has already
configured network information, close the SetIP program.
14.Click OK to continue the installation.
15.After the installation is finished, click Restart.
16.Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility.
• For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, open the Applications folder > System
Preferences and click Print & Fax.
17.Click Add on the Printer List.
• For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click the “+” icon. A display window will
pop up.
18.For Mac OS X 10.3, select the IP Printing tab.
• For Mac OS X 10.4, click IP Printer.
• For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click IP.
19.Select HP Jetdirect - Socket in Protocol.
When printing a document containing many pages, printing
performance may be enhanced by choosing Socket for Printer
Type option.
20.Enter the machine’s IP address in the Address input field.Network setup (SCX-3205W(K) only)_ 34
21.Enter the queue name in the Queue input field. If you cannot determine
the queue name for your machine server, try using the default queue
first.
22.For Mac OS X 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select
Samsung in Printer Model and your machine name in Model Name.
• For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select
Samsung in Print Using and your machine name in Model.
• For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly,
choose Select Printer Software and your machine name in Print
Using.
Your machine appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default
machine.
23.Click Add.
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and
reinstall it.
Follow steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh.
a) Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
b) Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
c) Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh
desktop.
d) Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
e) Double-click the Installer OS X icon.
f) Enter the password and click OK.
g) The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.
h) Read the license agreement and click Continue.
i) Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
j) Select Uninstall and click Uninstall.
k) When the message which warns that all applications will close on
your computer appears, click Continue.
l) When the uninstall is done, click Quit.
Linux
Install Linux Driver and add network Printer
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and
powered on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set.
2. Download the Unified Linux Driver package from the Samsung
website.
3. Extract the UnifiedLinuxDriver.tar.gz file and open the new directory.
4. Double-click the Linux folder.
5. Double-click the install.sh icon.
6. The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.
7. The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next.
8. Select Network printer and click Search button.
9. The Printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field.
10.Select your machine and click Next.
11.Input the printer description and Next
12.When the add printer is done, click Finish
13.When the install is done, click Finish
Add network Printer
1. Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator.
2. Click Add Printer…
3. The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next.
4. Select Network printer and click the Search button.
5. The printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field.
6. Select your machine and click Next.
7. Input the printer description and Next
8. When the add printer is done, click Finish.
IPV6 CONFIGURATION
TCP/IPv6 is supported properly only in Windows Vista or higher.
If the IPv6 network seems to not be working, set all the network setting
to the factory defaults and try again (See "Restoring factory default
settings" on page 32).
In the IPv6 network environment, follow the next procedure to use the IPv6
address.
1. Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
2. Turn on the machine.
3. Print a Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control
panel that will check IPv6 addresses (See "Printing a network
configuration report" on page 30).
4. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printer > Add
Printer.
5. Click Add a local printer on the Add Printer windows.
6. Follow the instruction on the window.
7. The Add Printer Wizard window appears. Follow the instruction on the
window.
If the machine does not work in the network environment, activate
IPv6. Refer to the next section followed by.
Printing a network configuration report
You can print a network configuration report from the machine’s control
panel that will show the current machine’s network settings. This will help
you to set up a network and troubleshoot problems.
1. In ready mode, press and hold Stop/Clear button on the control
panel for long enough (about four seconds) until the Status LED blinks
fast.
2. Then, release the button.
Using this Network Configuration Report, you can find your machine MAC
address and IP address.
For example:
• MAC Address:00:15:99:41:A2:78
• IP Address:192.0.0.192
Setting IPv6 addresses
Machine supports the following IPv6 addresses for network printing and
managements.
• Link-local Address: Self-configured local IPv6 address (Address starts
with FE80).
• Stateless Address: Automatically configured IPv6 address by a
network router.
• Stateful Address: IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server.
• Manual Address: Manually configured IPv6 address by a user.Network setup (SCX-3205W(K) only)_ 35
Manual address configuration
1. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6
addressing as a URL (See "Using SyncThru™ Web Service
(SCX-3205W(K) only)" on page 69).
For IPv4, enter the IPv4 address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the
address field and press the Enter key or click Go.
2. When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Network
Settings.
3. Click TCP/IPv6.
4. Enable the Manual Address In the TCP/IPv6 section.
5. Select the Address/Prefix and click the Add button, then the router
prefix will automatically be entered into the address field.
Enter the rest of address. (ex: 3FFE:10:88:194::AAAA. “A” is the
hexadecimal 0 through 9, A through F.)
6. Click the Apply button.
Installing printer driver
Driver installation for network printer in IPv6 network environment is same
as TCP/IPv4 (See "Installing network connected machine’s driver" on
page 32).
Select TCP/IP Port and when the list of machines are displayed, simply
select your machine's IPv6 address.
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
1. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6
addressing as a URL.
2. Select one of the IPv6 addresses (Link-local Address, Stateless
Address, Stateful Address, Manual Address) from Network
Configuration Report (See "Printing a network configuration report" on
page 30).
3. Enter the IPv6 addresses (ex: http://[FE80::215:99FF:FE66:7701]).
Address must be enclosed in '[ ]' brackets.Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))_ 36
4.wireless network setup (scx-3205w(k))
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the wireless network connected machine and software.
This chapter includes:
• Setting a wireless network with the WPS button
• Using a wireless network from the computer
• Setting a wireless network with USB cable
• Setting a wireless network with network cable
• Completing the installation
• Troubleshooting
For more information about the network environment, network
programs, and installing network connected machine’s driver, refer to
the following chapters.
• See "Network environment" on page 30.
• See "Introducing useful network programs" on page 30.
• See "Installing network connected machine’s driver" on page 32.
SETTING A WIRELESS NETWORK WITH THE
WPS BUTTON
You can install a wireless network with the WPS ( ) button.
After compleleting the wireless network connection, you need to install
a machine driver to print from an application (See "Installing network
connected machine’s driver" on page 32).
Setting a wireless network with the WPS button
If your machine and an access point (or wireless router) support Wi-Fi
Protected Setup™(WPS), you can easily configure the wireless network
settings by pressing the WPS ( ) button on the control panel.
If you want to use the wireless network using the infrastructure mode,
make sure that the network cable is disconnected from the machine.
Using the WPS (PBC) button or entering the PIN number from the
computer to connect to the Access Point varies depending on the
access point (or wireless router) you are using. Refer to the user's
guide of the access point (or wireless router) you are using.
Items to prepare
You need to ensure you have the following items ready to use:
• Check if the access point (or wireless router) supports Wi-Fi
Protected Setup™ (WPS).
• Check if your machine supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS).
• Networked computer (PIN mode only)
Refer to your network administrator, or the person that set up your
wireless network, for information about your network configuration.
Choosing your network connection
There are two methods to connect your machine to a wireless network
using the WPS ( ) button on the control panel.
The Push Button Configuration (PBC) method allows you to connect
your machine to a wireless network by pressing both the WPS ( )
button on the control panel of your machine and the WPS (PBC) button
on a Wi-Fi Protected Setup™(WPS)-enabled access point (or wireless
router) respectively.
The Personal Identification Number (PIN) method helps you connect
your machine to a wireless network by entering the supplied PIN
information on a Wi-Fi Protected Setup™(WPS)-enabled access point
(or wireless router).
Factory default in your machine is PBC mode, which is recommended
for a typical wireless network environment.
Connecting to a wireless network in PBC mode
To connect your machine to the wireless network in PBC mode, follow
the following steps:
You need to check the status of the wireless LED.
1. Press and hold the WPS ( ) button on the control panel for about
2 - 4 seconds until the status LED blinks quickly.
• : The light blinks slowly on wireless LED. The machine
starts connecting to the wireless network. The LED blinks slowly
for up to two minutes until you press the PBC button on access
point (or wireless router).
2. : Press the WPS (PBC) button on the access point (or wireless
router).
The wireless LED blinks in the order below:
a) : The light blinks fast on the wireless LED. The machine is
connecting to the access point (or wireless router).
b) : When the machine is successfully connected to the
wireless network, the wireless LED light stays on.
Connecting to the wireless network in PIN mode
To connect your machine to the wireless network, follow the following
steps:
You need to check the status of the wireless LED.
1. The network configuration report including PIN number must be
printed.
In ready mode, press and hold the Stop/Clear button on the
control panel for about 5 seconds. You can find your machine’s PIN
number.
2. Press and hold the WPS ( ) button on the control panel for
more than 4 seconds until the status LED on.
• : The light blinks slowly on the wireless LED. The machine
starts connecting to access point (or wireless router).
3. You need to enter eight-digit PIN number within two minutes to the
computer which is connected to the access point (or wireless router).
The LED blinks slowly for up to two minutes until you enter the
eight-digit PIN number
The wireless LED blinks in the order below:
a) : The light blinks fast on the wireless LED. The machine is Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))_ 37
connecting to the access point (or wireless router).
b) : When the machine is successfully connected to the
wireless network, the wireless LED light stays on.
Re-connecting to the wireless network
When the wireless function is off, the machine automatically tries to
re-connect to the access point (or wireless router) with the previously
used wireless connection settings and address.
In the following cases, the machine automatically re-connects to
the wireless network:
• The machine is turned off and on again.
• The access point (or wireless router) is turned off and on again.
Canceling a wireless network connection process
To cancel the wireless network connection function when the machine is
connecting to the wireless network, press and release the
Stop/Clear button on the control panel. You need to wait 2 minuites to
re-connect the wireless network.
Disconnecting a wireless network connection
To disconnect the wireless network connection, press the WPS ( )
button on the control panel for more than two seconds.
• When the Wi-Fi Network is in idle mode: The machine is
immediately disconnected from the wireless network, and the
wireless LED is off.
• When the Wi-Fi Network is being used: While the machine waits
until the current job is finished, the light blinks fast on the wireless
LED. Then, the wireless network connection is automatically
disconnected. The wireless LED is off.
When the Wi-Fi Network is disconnected, press the WPS ( )
button on the control panel. The Wi-Fi network is on and the
setting a wireless network begins.
USING A WIRELESS NETWORK FROM THE
COMPUTER
Choosing your network connection
Typically, you can only have one connection between your computer and
the machine at a time. There are types of network connections to consider.
• Wireless network without access point (Ad-Hoc mode)
• Wireless network with an access point (Infrastructure mode)
How to print a network configuration report
You can identify the network settings of your machine by printing a network
configuration report.
To print the report:
1. In ready mode, press and hold Stop/Clear button on the control
panel for long enough (about four seconds) until the Status LED blinks
fast.
2. Then, release the button.
Using this Network Configuration Report, you can find your machine MAC
address and IP address.
For example:
• MAC Address:00:15:99:41:A2:78
• IP Address:192.0.0.192
IP addresses
Every device in a network has a unique numerical address called an IP
Address. Your machine came with a Default IP address of 192.0.0.192,
which you can verify by printing out a Network Configuration Report or
Configuration Report.
• DHCP IP assignment: Connect your machine to the network, and wait a
few minutes for the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the
machine. Then, print the Network Configuration Report as explained
above. If the report shows that the IP address has changed, the
assignment was successful. You will see the new IP address in the
report.
• Static IP assignment: Use the SetIP program to change the IP address
from your computer (See "Setting IP address" on page 31).
In an office environment, we recommend that you contact a network
administrator to set this address for you.
Wireless network name and network key
Wireless networks require higher security, so when an access point is first
set up, a network name (SSID), the type of security used, and a Network
Key are created for the network. Locate this information before proceeding
with the machine installation.
Infrastructure mode
This is an environment generally used for homes
and SOHOs. This mode uses an access point to
communicate with the wireless machine.
• See "Installing the machine on a wireless
network with an access point (Windows)" on
page 38.
• See "Installing the machine on a wireless
network with an access point (Macintosh)" on
page 40.
Ad-Hoc mode
This mode does not use an access point. The
wireless computer and wireless machine
communicates directly.
• See "Installing the machine on an Ad-Hoc
wireless network (Windows)" on page 39.
• See "Installing the machine on an Ad-Hoc
wireless network (Macintosh)" on page 41.
After choosing your configuration, follow the simple directions for your
computer operating system, but first locate the software CD supplied
with the machine before proceeding.
Installing a wireless network with cables
You can install a wireless network to connect to the machine with either a
USB cable or a network cable. For most users, we recommend using a USB
cable with the program provided in the supplied software CD.
The following are two ways to install a wireless network with cables.
• With a USB cable: You can simply set up a wireless network using the
program in the supplied software CD. Only Windows and Macintosh
operating system are supported (See "Setting a wireless network with
USB cable" on page 38).
You can also install a wireless network in Printer Settings Utility
with USB cable after installing driver. (Windows and Macintosh
operating system are supported.)
• With a network cable: You can set up a wireless network using the
SyncThru™ Web Service program (See "Setting a wireless network withWireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))_ 38
network cable" on page 42).
SETTING A WIRELESS NETWORK WITH USB
CABLE
Refer to your network administrator, or the person that set up your
wireless network, for information about your network configuration.
Installing the machine on a wireless network with an
access point (Windows)
Items to prepare
Ensure you have next items ready.
• Access point
• Network-connected computer
• Software CD that provided with your machine
• The machine installed with a wireless interface
• USB cable
Creating the infrastructure network in Windows
When the items are ready, follow below steps:
1. Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.
2. Turn on your computer, access point and machine.
3. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
• The software CD should automatically run and an installation
window appears.
• If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then
Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which
represents your CD-ROM drive. Click OK.
• If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008
R2 click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run.
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents
your CD-ROM and click OK.
• If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7 or
Windows Server 2008 R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run
program field, and click Continue or Yes in the User Account
Control windows.
4. Select the Wireless Setting and Installation option.
• Install Now: First you must configure the wireless network
settings of your printer to print through wireless.
• Wireless Setting and Installation: Configure the wireless
network settings of your printer with a USB cable then install the
printer driver. Press this button to set up the wireless connection
if you have not set up the wireless connection before.
5. Read License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the
License Agreement. Then, click Next.
6. The software searches the wireless network.
If the searching has failed, you may check if the USB cable is
connected between the computer and machine properly, and
follow the instruction on the window.
7. After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices.
Select the name (SSID) of access point you are using and click
Next.
If you cannot find out the network name you want to choose, or
if you want to set the wireless configuration manually, click
Advanced Setting.
• Enter the wireless Network Name: Type the SSID of
access point you want (SSID is case-sensitive).
• Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure.
• Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption
may or may not be used, depending on the need for data
security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a
proper WEP key can access the network.
WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to
authenticate the print server based on WPA Pre-Shared
Key. This uses a shared secret key (generally called Pre
Shared Key pass phrase) which is manually configured on
the access point and each of its clients.
• Encryption: Select the encryption. (None, WEP64,
WEP128, TKIP, AES, TKIP AES)
• Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value.
• Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network
key value.
• WEP Key Index: If you are using the WEP Encryption,
select the appropriate WEP Key Index.
The wireless network security window does appear when the
access point has security setting.
The wireless network security window appears. The window
may differ according to its security mode, WEP or WPA.
• In case of WEP
Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication
and enter WEP security key. Click Next.
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol
preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network.
WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged
on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP
encryption key.
• In case of WPA
Enter the WPA shared key and click Next.
WPA authorizes and identifies users based on a secret key
that changes automatically at regular intervals. WPA also
uses TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) and AES
(Advanced Encryption Standard) for data encryption.
8. The window shows the wireless network setting and check if settings
are right. Click Next.
• For the DHCP method
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is
shown in the window. However, if it shows Static, click Change Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))_ 39
TCP/IP to change the assignment method to DHCP.
• For the Static method
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is
shown in the window. However, if it shows DHCP, click Change
TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration
values for the machine. Before entering the IP address for the
machine, you must know the computer’s network configuration
information. If the computer is set to DHCP, you must contact the
network administrator to get the static IP address.
Example)
If computer’s network information is as below:
- IP address: 169.254.133.42
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Machine’s network information should be as below:
- IP address: 169.254.133. 43 (Use computer’s IP address,
with changed last three digits.)
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet
mask.)
- Gateway: 169.254.133.1 (Change the last three digits from IP
address of your machine to 1.)
9. When the wireless network setting is completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine. Click Next.
10. Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears. Then, click
Next.
Select Yes if you accept the current settings and continue the setup
procedure.
Select No if you want to return to the beginning screen.
Then, click Next.
11.Click Next when the Confirm Printer Connection window appears.
12.Select the components to be installed. Click Next.
After selecting the components, you can also change the machine
name, set the machine to be shared on the network, set the machine
as the default machine, and change the port name of each machine.
Click Next.
13.After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test
page appears. If you want to print a test page, click Print a test
page.
Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 15.
14.If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.
If not, click No to reprint it.
15.To register as a user of the machine in order to receive information
from Samsung, click On-line Registration.
16.Click Finish.
Installing the machine on an Ad-Hoc wireless
network (Windows)
If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the machine
wirelessly to your computer by setting up an Ad-Hoc wireless network by
following the simple steps below.
Items to prepare
Ensure you have next items ready.
• Wireless network computer
• Software CD provided with your machine
• Wireless network machine
• USB cable
Creating the Ad-Hoc network in Windows
When the items are ready, follow below steps:
1. Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.
2. Turn on your computer and the wireless network machine.
3. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
• The software CD should automatically run and an installation
window appear.
• If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then
Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which
represents your drive. Click OK.
• If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008
R2 click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run.
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents
your drive and click OK.
• If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7 or
Windows Server 2008 R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run
program field, and click Continue or Yes in the User Account
Control windows.
4. Select the Wireless Setting and Installation option.
• Install Now: First you must configure the wireless network
settings of your printer to print through wireless.
• Wireless Setting and Installation: Configure the wireless
network settings of your printer with a USB cable then install the
printer driver. Press this button to set up the wireless connection
if you have not set up the wireless connection before.
5. Read the License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the
License Agreement. Then, click Next.
6. The software searches the wireless network.
If the software has failed to search the network, check if the
USB cable is connected properly between the computer and
machine, and follow the instruction on the window.
7. After searching the wireless network, a list of wireless network your
machine has searched appears.
If you want to use the Samsung default ad-hoc setting, select the last
wireless network on the list, which Network Name(SSID) is
airportthru and Signal is Printer Self Network.
Then, click Next.
If you want to use other ad-hoc settings, select other wireless
network from the list.
If you want to change ad-hoc settings click the Advanced
Setting button.
• Enter the wireless Network Name: Type in the SSID Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))_ 40
name you want (SSID is case-sensitive).
• Operation Mode: Select Ad-hoc.
• Channel: Select the channel.
• Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption
may or may not be used, depending on the need for data
security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a
proper WEP key can access the network.
• Encryption: Select the encryption. (None, WEP64,
WEP128)
• Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value.
• Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network
key value.
• WEP Key Index: If you are using the WEP Encryption,
select the appropriate WEP Key Index.
The wireless network security window appears when the
ad-hoc network has security setting.
The wireless network security window appears. Select Open
System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next.
• WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol
preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network.
WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged
on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP
encryption key.
8. The window which shows the wireless network setting appears.
Check the settings and click Next.
Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know
the computer’s network configuration information. If the
computer’s network configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless
network setting should also be DHCP. Likewise, if the
computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the wireless
network setting should also be Static.
If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use Static
wireless network setting, you must contact the network
administrator to get the static IP address.
• For the DHCP method
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if
DHCP is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm
window. However, if it shows Static, click Change TCP/IP
to change the assignment method to Receive IP address
automatically (DHCP).
• For the Static method
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if
Static is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm
window. However, if it shows DHCP, click Change TCP/IP
to enter the IP address and other network configuration
values for the machine.
Example)
If computer’s network information is as below:
- IP address: 169.254.133.42
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Machine’s network information should be as below:
- IP address: 169.254.133. 43 (Use computer’s IP
address, with changed last three digits.)
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet
mask.)
- Gateway: 169.254.133.1 (Change the last three digits
from IP address of your machine to 1.)
9. When the wireless network setting is completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine. Click Next.
If the Change PC Network Setting window appears, follow
the steps on the window.
Click Next if you are finished the computer’s wireless network
settings.
If you set the computer’s wireless network as DHCP, it will take
several minutes to receive the IP address.
10.The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears.
Select Yes if you accept the current settings and continue the setup
procedure.
Select No if you want to return to the beginning screen.
Then, click Next.
11.Click Next when the Confirm Printer Connection window appears.
12.Select the components to be installed. Click Next.
After selecting the components, you can also change the machine
name, set the machine to be shared on the network, set the machine
as the default machine and change the port name of each machine.
Click Next.
13.After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test
page appears. If you want to print a test page, click Print a test
page.
Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 15.
14.If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.
If not, click No to reprint it.
15.To register as a user of the machine in order to receive information
from Samsung, click On-line Registration.
16.Click Finish.
Installing the machine on a wireless network with an
access point (Macintosh)
Items to prepare
Ensure you have next items ready.
• Access point
• Network-connected computer
• Software CD that provided with your machine
• The machine installed with a wireless network interface
• USB cable
Creating the infrastructure network in Macintosh
When the items are ready, follow below steps:
1. Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.
2. Turn on your computer, access point and machine.
3. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
4. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh
desktop.
5. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
6. Double-click the Installer OS X icon.
7. Enter the password and click OK.
8. The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.
9. Read the license agreement and click Continue.
10.Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
11.Select Easy Install and click Install.Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))_ 41
Easy Install is recommended for most users. All components
necessary for machine operations will be installed. If you select
Custom Install, you can choose individual operations will be
installed.
12.Select the Wireless Setting and Installation option.
13.The software searches the wireless network.
If the searching has failed, you may check if the USB cable is
connected between the computer and machine properly, and
follow the instruction on the window.
14.After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices.
Select the name (SSID) of access point you are using and click
Next.
When you set the wireless configuration manually, click
Advanced Setting.
• Enter the wireless Network Name: Type the SSID of
access point you want (SSID is case-sensitive).
• Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure.
• Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption
may or may not be used, depending on the need for data
security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a
proper WEP key can access the network.
WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to
authenticate the print server based on WPA Pre-Shared
Key. This uses a shared secret key (generally called Pre
Shared Key pass phrase) which is manually configured on
the access point and each of its clients.
• Encryption: Select the encryption. (None, WEP64,
WEP128, TKIP, AES, TKIP AES)
• Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value.
• Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network
key value.
• WEP Key Index: If you are using the WEP Encryption,
select the appropriate WEP Key Index.
The wireless network security window does appear when the
access point has security setting.
The wireless network security window appears. The window
may differ according to its security mode, WEP or WPA.
• In case of WEP
Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication
and enter WEP security key. Click Next.
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol
preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network.
WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged
on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP
encryption key.
• In case of WPA
Enter the WPA shared key and click Next.
WPA authorizes and identifies users based on a secret key
that changes automatically at regular intervals. WPA also
uses TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) and AES
(Advanced Encryption Standard) for data encryption.
15.The window shows the wireless network setting and check if settings
are right. Click Next.
• For the DHCP method
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is
shown in the window. However, if it shows Static, click Change
TCP/IP to change the assignment method to DHCP.
• For the Static method
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is
shown in the window. However, if it shows DHCP, click Change
TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration
values for the machine. Before entering the IP address for the
machine, you must know the computer’s network configuration
information. If the computer is set to DHCP, you must contact the
network administrator to get the static IP address.
Example)
If computer’s network information is as below:
- IP address: 169.254.133.42
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Machine’s network information should be as below:
- IP address: 169.254.133. 43 (Use computer’s IP address,
with changed last three digits.)
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet
mask.)
- Gateway: 169.254.133.1 (Change the last three digits from IP
address of your machine to 1.)
16.The wireless network is connecting according to the network
configuration.
17.When the wireless network setting is completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine.
18.After the installation is finished, click Restart.
Installing the machine on an Ad-Hoc wireless
network (Macintosh)
If you do not have a access point (AP), you may still connect the machine
wirelessly to your computer by setting up an Ad-Hoc wireless network by
following these simple directions.
Items to prepare
Ensure you have next items ready.
• Wireless network-connected computer
• Software CD that provided with your machine
• The machine installed with a wireless network interface
• USB cable
Creating the Ad-Hoc network in Macintosh
When the items are ready, follow below steps:
1. Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.
2. Turn on your computer and machine.
3. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
4. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh
desktop.
5. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
6. Double-click the Installer OS X icon.
7. Enter the password and click OK.
8. The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.
9. Read the license agreement and click Continue.
10.Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
11.Select Easy Install and click Install.
Easy Install is recommended for most users. All components
necessary for machine operations will be installed. If you select
Custom Install, you can choose individual operations will be Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))_ 42
installed.
12.Click Wireless Setting and Installation.
13.The software searches the wireless network devices.
If the searching has failed, you may check if the USB cable is
connected between the computer and machine properly, and
follow the instruction on the window.
14.After searching the wireless network, a list of wireless network your
machine has searched appears.
If you want to use the Samsung default ad-hoc setting, select the last
wireless network on the list, which Network Name(SSID) is
airportthru and Signal is Printer Self Network.
Then, click Next.
If you want to use other ad-hoc settings, select other wireless
network from the list.
If you want to change ad-hoc settings click the Advanced
Setting button.
• Enter the wireless Network Name: Type in the SSID
name you want (SSID is case-sensitive).
• Operation Mode: Select Ad-hoc.
• Channel: Select the channel.
• Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption
may or may not be used, depending on the need for data
security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a
proper WEP key can access the network.
• Encryption: Select the encryption. (None, WEP64,
WEP128)
• Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value.
• Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network
key value.
• WEP Key Index: If you are using the WEP Encryption,
select the appropriate WEP Key Index.
The wireless network security window appears when the
ad-hoc network has security setting.
The wireless network security window appears. Select Open
System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next.
• WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol
preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network.
WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged
on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP
encryption key.
15.The window which shows the wireless network setting appears.
Check the settings and click Next.
Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know
the computer’s network configuration information. If the
computer’s network configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless
network setting should also be DHCP. Likewise, if the
computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the wireless
network setting should also be Static.
If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use Static
wireless network setting, you must contact the network
administrator to get the static IP address.
• For the DHCP method
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if
DHCP is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm
window. However, if it shows Static, click Change TCP/IP
to change the assignment method to Receive IP address
automatically (DHCP).
• For the Static method
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if
Static is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm
window. However, if it shows DHCP, click Change TCP/IP
to enter the IP address and other network configuration
values for the machine.
Example)
If computer’s network information is as below:
- IP address: 169.254.133.42
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Machine’s network information should be as below:
- IP address: 169.254.133. 43 (Use computer’s IP
address, with changed last three digits.)
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet
mask.)
- Gateway: 169.254.133.1 (Change the last three digits
from IP address of your machine to 1.)
16.The wireless network is connecting according to the network
configuration.
17.When the wireless network setting is completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine.
18.After the installation is finished, click Restart.
SETTING A WIRELESS NETWORK WITH
NETWORK CABLE
Your machine is a network compatible machine. To enable your machine to
work with your network you will need to perform some configuration
procedures.
Refer to your network administrator, or the person that set up your
wireless network, for information about your network configuration.
Preparing items
Ensure you have next items ready.
• Access point
• Network-connected computer
• Software CD that provided with your machine
• The machine installed with a wireless network interface
• Network cable
Setting IP address
Firstly, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and
managements. In most cases a new IP address will be automatically
assigned by a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server located
on the network.
In a few situations the IP address must be set manually. This is called a
static IP and is often required in corporate Intranets for security reasons.
• DHCP IP assignment: Connect your machine to the network, and wait a
few minutes for the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the
machine. Then, print the Network Configuration Report as explained
above. If the report shows that the IP address has changed, the
assignment was successful. You will see the new IP address in the
report (See "How to print a network configuration report" on page 37).
• Static IP assignment: Use SetIP program to change the IP address Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))_ 43
from your computer.
In an office environment, we recommend that you contact a network
administrator to set this address for you.
IP setting using SetIP Program (Windows)
This program is for manually setting the network IP address of your
machine using its MAC address to communicate with the machine. A
MAC address is the hardware serial number of the network interface and
can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
For using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing
by performing the following:
1. Open Start > All programs > Control Panel.
2. Double-click Security Center.
3. Click Windows Firewall.
4. Disable the firewall.
Installing the program
1. Insert the Printer Software CD-ROM provided with your machine.
When the driver CD runs automatically, close that window.
2. Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive. (X represents your
CD-ROM drive.)
3. Double-click Application > SetIP.
4. Double-click Setup.exe to install this program.
5. Click OK. If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
6. Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation.
Starting the program
1. Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
2. Turned on the machine.
3. From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung
Printers > SetIP > SetIP.
4. Click on the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the
TCP/IP configuration window.
5. Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window
as follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this
information assigned by a network manager before proceeding.
• MAC Address: Find the machine’s MAC address from the
Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons.
For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8.
• IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your printer.
For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150,
enter 192.168.1.X. (X is number between 1 and 254 other than
the computer’s address.)
• Subnet Mask: Enter a Subnet Mask.
• Default Gateway: Enter a Default Gateway.
6. Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print
the Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are
correct.
7. Click Exit to close the SetIP program.
8. If necessary, restart the computer’s firewall.
IP setting using SetIP Program (Macintosh)
For using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing
by performing the following:
The path and UIs may differ by Mac OS version. Refer to the Mac
OS manual.
1. Open System Preferences.
2. Click Security.
3. Click the Firewall menu.
4. Turn firewall off.
The following instructions may vary for your model.
1. Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
2. Insert the Installation CD-ROM, and open the disk window, select
MAC_Installer > MAC_Printer > SetIP > SetIPApplet.html.
3. Double-click the file and Safari will automatically open, then select
Trust. The browser will open the SetIPApplet.html page that shows
the printer’s name and IP address information.
4. Click on the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the
TCP/IP configuration window.
5. Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window
as follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this
information assigned by a network manager before proceeding.
• MAC Address: Find the machine’s MAC address from the
Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons.
For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8.
• IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your printer.
For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150,
enter 192.168.1.X. (X is number between 1 and 254 other than
the computer’s address.)
• Subnet Mask: Enter a Subnet Mask.
• Default Gateway: Enter a Default Gateway.
6. Select Apply, then OK, and OK again. The printer will automatically
print the configuration report. Confirm that all the settings are correct.
Quit Safari. You may close and eject the installation CD-ROM. If
necessary, restart the computer’s firewall. You have successfully
changed the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway.
Configuring the machine’s wireless network
Before starting you will need to know the network name(SSID) of your
wireless network and the network key if it is encrypted. This information was
set when the access point (or wireless router) was installed. If you do not
know about your wireless environment, please ask the person who has set
up your network.
To configure wireless parameters, you can use SyncThru™ Web Service.
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
Before starting wireless parameter configuration, make sure cable
connection status. Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))_ 44
1. Check whether the network cable is connected to the machine. If not,
connect the machine with a standard network cable.
2. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari or Firefox and
enter your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
For example,
3. Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service
website.
The Login window appears.
4. Type in the ID and Password then click Login.
If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the
below default ID and password.
• ID: admin
• Password: sec00000
5. When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Network
Settings.
6. Click Wireless > Wizard.
Wizard will help you setup the wireless network configuration.
However, if you want to set the wireless network directly, select
Custom.
7. Select the one Network Name(SSID) in the list.
• SSID: SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a
wireless network. access points and wireless devices attempting
to connect to a specific wireless network must use the same
SSID. The SSID is case-sensitive.
• Operation Mode: Operation Mode refers to the type of wireless
connections (See "Wireless network name and network key" on
page 37).
- Ad-hoc: Allows wireless devices to communicate directly with
each other in a peer-to-peer environment.
- Infrastructure: Allows wireless devices to communicate with
each other through an access point.
If your network’s Operation Mode is Infrastructure, select the
SSID of the access point. If the Operation Mode is Ad-hoc,
select the machine’s SSID. Note that “airportthru” is the default
SSID of your machine.
8. Click Next.
If wireless security setting window appears, enter the registered
password (network key) and click Next.
9. The confirmation window appears, please check your wireless setup.
If the setup is right, click Apply.
Disconnect the network cable (standard or network). Your
machine should then start communicating wirelessly with the
network. In case of Ad-hoc mode, you can use a wireless LAN
and wired LAN simultaneously.
COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION
After you have installed your Samsung wireless network printer, print
another copy of the Network Configuration Report and keep it for future
reference. You are now ready to use your new Samsung wireless printer on
your network.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Solve problems that might occur during wireless setting and installing the
machine driver.
Wireless network problems
If problems occur while using the machine on a network, check the
followings.
Printers Not Found
• Your machine may not be turned on. Turn on your computer and the
machine.
• USB cable is not connected between your computer and machine.
Connect machine to your computer using the USB cable.
• The machine does not support wireless network. Check the
machine's user's guide included on the software CD supplied with
your machine and prepare a wireless network machine.
Connecting Failure - Not found SSID
• The machine is unable to search network name (SSID) which you
have selected or typed in. Check the network name (SSID) on your
access point and try connecting again.
• Your access point is not turned on. Turn on your access point.
Connecting Failure - Invalid Security
• You configured security incorrectly. Check the configured security on
your access point and machine.
Connecting Failure - General Connection Error
• Your computer is not receiving a signal form your machine. Check
the USB cable and your machine power.
• When Temporal Key Integrity Protocol(TKIP) security is set up for
the access point, connection might fail. Change the access point
settings.
Connecting Failure - Connected Wired Network
• Your machine is connected with wired network cable. Remove the
wired network cable from your machine.
PC Connection Error
• The configured network address is unable to connect between your
computer and machine.
- For DHCP network environment
The print receives the IP address automatically (DHCP) when
computer is configured to DHCP.
- For Static network environment
The machine uses the static address when computer is
configured to static address.
If you computer has following addresses,
- IP address: 192.168.1.100
- Subnet address: 255.255.255.0
- Gateway address: 192.168.1.1
Type in the following address for your machine,
- IP address: 192.168.1.101
- Subnet address: 255.255.255.0
- Gateway address: 192.168.1.1Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))_ 45
Solving other problems
If problems occur while using the machine on a network, check the
followings.
For information on access point (or wireless router), refer to its own
user's guide.
• Your computer, access point or machine may not be turned on.
• Check the wireless reception around the machine. If the reception is far
from the machine or there is an obstacle, you might have difficulty
receiving the signal.
• Cycle the power for access point (or wireless router), machine and
computer. Sometimes cycling the power can recover network
communication.
• Check whether firewall software (V3 or Norton) is blocking the
communication.
If the computer and the machine is connected on a same network it
cannot be searched, firewall software might be blocking the
communication. Refer to the user's guide for the software to turn it off
and try searching the machine again.
• Check whether the machine's IP address is allocated correctly. You can
check the IP address by printing the network configuration report.
• Check whether access point (or wireless router) has a configured
security (password). If it has a password, refer to the access point (or
wireless router) administrator.
• Check whether the machine's IP address. Reinstall the machine driver
and change the settings to connect to the machine on the network. Due
to the characteristics of DHCP, the allocated IP address could change if
the machine is not used for a long time or if the access point has been
reset.
• Check the wireless environment. You might not be able to connect to the
network in the infrastructure environment where you need to type in a
user's information before connecting to access point (or wireless router).
• This machine only supports IEEE 802.11 b/g/n and Wi-Fi. For some
counties, only 802.11 b/g can be applied. Other wireless communication
(Bluetooth) is not supported.
• When using the Ad-hoc mode, for operating systems such as Windows
Vista, you might need to set the wireless connection setting every time
you use the wireless machine.
• You cannot use infrastructure mode and Ad-hoc mode at the same time
for Samsung wireless network machine.
• The machine is within the range of the wireless network.
For most networks, the machine should be within 30 meters (100 feet) of
the wireless access point (or wireless router).
• The machine is located away from obstacles that could block the
wireless signal.
Remove any large metal objects between the access point (or wireless
router) and the machine.
Make sure the machine and wireless access point (or wireless router)
are not separated by poles, walls, or support columns containing metal
or concrete.
• The machine is located away from other electronic devices that may
interfere with the wireless signal.
Many devices can interfere with the wireless signal, including baby
monitors, motors, cordless phones, security system cameras, other
wireless networks, and some Bluetooth devices.Basic setup_ 46
5.basic setup
After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine’s default settings. Refer to the next section if you would like
to set or change values. This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the machine.
This chapter includes:
• Altitude adjustment
• Setting the default tray and paper
• Using the power saving feature
• Changing font setting
ALTITUDE ADJUSTMENT
The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined
by the height of the machine above sea level. The following information will
guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best quality
of print.
Before you set the altitude value, determine the altitude where you are.
0
4,000 m
(13,123 ft)
3,000 m
(9,842 ft)
2,000 m
(6,561 ft)
1,000 m
(3,280 ft)
4
3
2
1
1 High 1
2 High 2
3 High 3
4 Normal
You can altitude adjustment in Printer Settings Utility.
1. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or
Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the status
bar in Mac OS X (See "Using the Smart Panel program" on page 70).
Or, if you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu,
select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer
driver name > Smart Panel.
2. Click Printer Setting.
3. Click Setting > Altitude Adjustment. Select necessary options from the
drop-down list.
4. Click the Apply button.
If your machine is connected to a network, SyncThru™ Web Service
screen appears automatically. This can be also adjusted via SyncThru™
Web Service.
SETTING THE DEFAULT TRAY AND PAPER
You can select the tray and paper you would like to keep using for printing
job.
From your computer
Windows
1. Click the Windows Start menu.
2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.
• For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.
• For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel >
Hardware and Sound > Printers.
• For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers.
• For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware
> Devices and Printers.
3. Right-click on your machine.
4. For Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, press Printing
Preferences.
For Windows 7/Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus,
select the Printing Preferences.
If Printing Preferences item has a ► mark, you can select
other printer drivers connected with the selected printer.
5. Click Paper tab.
6. Select tray and its options, such as paper size and type.
7. Press OK.
If you want to use special-sized paper such as a billing paper,
select Edit... in the Paper tab in the Printing Preferences (See
"Opening printing preferences" on page 55).
Macintosh
Macintosh does not support this function. Macintosh users need to
change the default setting manually each time they want to print using
other settings.
1. Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want to print.
2. Open the File menu and click Print.
3. Go to Paper Feed pane.
4. Set appropriate tray from which you want to print.
5. Go to Paper pane.
6. Set paper type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from
which you want to print.
7. Click Print to print.
Linux
1. Open Terminal Program.
2. When the Terminal screen appears, type in the following:
[root@localhost root]# lpr